g 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
THE JACQUARD MACHINE 
 
 Analyzed and Explained 
 
 WITH AN APPENDIX 
 
 ON THE 
 
 PREPARATION OF JACQUARD CARDS, 
 
 AND 
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS TO LEARNERS OF JACQUARD DESIGNING. 
 
 
 K. A. POSSELT, 
 
 Head Master, Textile Department, Pennsylvania Museum and School of Industrial Art, 
 No. 1336 Spring Garden Street. 
 
 With 230 Illustrations. 
 
 
 PHILADELPHIA, 
 
 PA.: 
 
 
 PUBLISHED 
 
 UNDER THE AUSPICES OF 
 
 THE SCHOOL. 
 
 
 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 Y 
 
 
 

 Copyrighted, iSS7, 
 
 BV 
 
 E. A. POSSELT. 
 
 H 
 
 ?\ 
 
 Photo-Engravings by 
 Press of 
 
 The le\ttype company. 
 Dando Printing and publishing Co., 
 
 Philadelphia. 
 34 S Third St.. Philadelphia. 
 
TABLE OK CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 History of the Jacquard Machine, 7 
 
 The Jacquard Machine — General Arrangement and Application, .... 9 
 Illustration of the different parts of the Jacquard Machine — Method of Operation, etc., n 
 
 The Jacquard Harness — The Comber-boards 20 
 
 Tying-up of Jacquard Harness, 2 , 
 
 I. — Straight-through Tie-up, ........... 23 
 
 II. — Straight-through Tie-up for Repeated Effects, in one Repeat of the Design, . . 29 
 
 III. — Straight-through Tie-up of Jacquard Loom, having Front Harness attached, . . 31 
 
 IV. — Centre Tie-up, ............. 33 
 
 V. — Straight-through and Point Tie-ups Combined, ....... 3c 
 
 VI. — Straight-through Tie-up in Two Sections, ........ 48 
 
 VII. — Tying-up a Jacquard Harness for Figuring Part of the Design with an Extra Warp, . 51 
 
 VIII. — Straight-through Tie-up in Three Sections, ........ 53 
 
 IX. — Point Tie-up in Three Sections, .......... re 
 
 X. — Combination Tie-up in Two Sections, ........ 56 
 
 XI. — Straight-through Tie-up in Four Sections, ....... sy 
 
 XII. — Tying-up of Jacquard Looms with Compound Harness attached, .... 58 
 
 XIII. — Tying-up Jacquard Looms for Gauze Fabrics, ....... 64 
 
 Modifications of the Single Lift Jacquard Machine 67 
 
 I. — Double Lift Single Cylinder Jacquard Machine, ....... 67 
 
 II. — Double Lift Double Cylinder Jacquard Machine 69 
 
 III. — Substitution of Tail-cords for Hooks, ......... 71 
 
 Tying-up of Jacquard Harness for Two-ply Ingrain Carpet, 72 
 
 General Description of the Construction of the Fabric, . . . . . . 72 
 
 Straight-through Tie-up for Ingrain Carpet, ........ 74 
 
 Point Tie-up for Ingrain Carpet, .......... 78 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Preparing and Stamping of Jacquard Cards 85 
 
 Dobby Card Punching Machines, ...... ... 86 
 
 Piano Card Stamping Machines, ...... .86 
 
 Stamping of Cards, g T 
 
 Repeating Jacquard Cards by the Positive Action Repeater, 92 
 
 Lacing of Jacquard Cards, 97 
 
 Lacing of Jacquard Cards by Hand, .......... 97 
 
 Lacing of Jacquard Cards by Machine, 98 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS.— Continued. 
 PRACTICAL HINTS TO LEARNERS OF JACQUARD DESIGNING. 
 
 I \r.l . 
 
 Squared Designing Paper for the different Textile Fabrics executed on the Jacquard 
 
 Machine, ............. 103 
 
 Practical Use of the Heavy Square in Designing Paper, 105 
 
 Selection of Designing Paper for Single Cloth, 105 
 
 Selection of Designing Paper for Double Cloth, ........ 106 
 
 Selection of Designing Paper for Two-ply Ingrain Carpet, 106 
 
 Selection of the Proper Brush for the different n Designing Papers 107 
 
 Colors used for Painting Textile Designs, .......... 107 
 
 Preservation of Textile Designs, .......... 107 
 
 Sketching of Designs for Textile Fabrics to be executed on the Jacquard Machine, 108 
 
 Methods of Setting the Figures, .......... 108 
 
 Size of Sketch Required, ............ 109 
 
 Enlarging and Reducing Figures for Sketches no 
 
 Transferring of the Sketch to the Squared Designing Paper, 112 
 
 Outlining in Squares, ............ 113 
 
 Rules for Outlining in Squares Inside or Outside the Drawing Outline 114 
 
 Illustration of a Sketch — Outlining on □ Paper — Finished Design — Fabric Sample (Sin- 
 gle Cloth), 115 
 
 Designs for Damask Fabrics to be executed on a Jacquard Loom, with Compound Har- 
 ness attached, ............. 116 
 
 Designs for Two-ply Ingrain Carpet, 116 
 
 Designs for Dressgoods Figured with Extra Warp, . . . . . . .117 
 
 Designs for Figured Pile Fabrics, . . . . . . . . . .118 
 
 The Shading of Textile Fabrics by the Weave, 118 
 
 Glossary, . 121 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 \/ERY little has been written upon the Jacquard machine, and the fabrics produced 
 by it ; and nothing at all has been heretofore published in this country with 
 regard to the machines and systems, as employed here. 
 
 Greatly assisted by the guidance, help and advice of Mr. T. C. Search, President 
 of the Philadelphia Textile Association, and Vice-President and Chairman of the 
 Committee of Instruction of the Pennsylvania Museum and School of Industrial 
 Art, the author gives here the results of his practical experience on this subject, 
 with a very detailed description of the methods of procedure with the Jacquard 
 and accompanying machines, in the different branches of Textile Manufacture. 
 
 E. A. POSSELT. 
 
 Philadelphia, Pa., iSSS. 
 
HISTORY OK 
 
 The Jacquard Machine. 
 
 The Jacquard machine was named after Joseph Marie Jacquard. Jacquard 
 was born in Lyons, France, on the 7th of July, 1752. His parents were employed 
 in the manufacture of silk fabrics. The first trade Jacquard learned was book- 
 binding ; type-founding and cutlery following successively. He was 20 years of age 
 when his father died, leaving him a small house and hand-loom in the village of 
 Cauzon, near Lyons. He commenced to invent different improvements in the line 
 of weaving, but without other success than accumulating debt, compelling him to 
 earn the living for himself and family, first in a plaster quarrv at Bugey, near Lyons, 
 afterwards by working at cutlery, type-founding and weaving in Lyons. 
 
 In 1792 he joined the Revolutionists, and after his return in the following year 
 he and his son assisted in the defence of Lyons against the Army of the Convention, 
 but left when his son was killed near him in battle. 
 
 Lyons Council offered him a room, for working on improvements for weaving at 
 the " Palace of the Fine Arts," with the condition that he should instruct scholars free 
 of charge. During his stay there the Society of Arts, in London, offered a reward for 
 a machine for making fishing nets. Jacquard succeeded in perfecting it, but had to 
 travel under protection to Paris, where he had to show and explain his machine 
 before the " Conservatorium of Arts and Trades." 
 
 On the 2d of February, 1804, Jacquard received 3000 francs, and the gold 
 medal from the London Society, and also an engagement in the Conservatorium of 
 Arts, in Paris. Here he found opportunity for making improvements on his 
 weaving machine, by the study of the older inventions of Bouchon, Falcon and 
 Vancanson. 
 
 M. Bouchon, in 1725, employed a band of pierced paper pressed by a hand-bar 
 against a row of horizontal wires, so as to push forward those which happened to lie 
 opposite the blank spaces, and thus bring loops at the lower extremity of vertical 
 wires in connection with a comb-like rack below. M. Falcon submitted in 1728 a 
 chain of cards, and a square prism, known as the cylinder, in lieu of the band of 
 paper of Bouchon. In 1745, Jacques de Vancanson suppressed altogether the 
 cumbrous tail-cards of the draw-loom, and made the loom completely self-acting 
 by placing the pierced paper or card upon the surface of a large pierced cylinder, 
 which traveled backwards and forwards at each stroke, and revolved through a small 
 angle by ratchet work. He also invented the rising and falling griffe, and thus 
 made a machine very nearly resembling the actual Jacquard. 
 

 Jacquard returned to Lyons in the year 1804 to take charge of the work-house. 
 During his stay at this place he finished his machine. He was an experienced 
 workman, combining together the best parts of the machines of his predecessors in 
 the same line, and succeeded as the first person in obtaining an arrangement 
 sufficiently practical to be generally employed. In 1806 Napoleon Buonaparte 
 changed his position, giving him an annuity of 3000 francs, but compelling him to 
 transfer his invention to the city of Lyons, as well as any further inventions. Until 
 1810 Jacquard had great troubles, as his machine was not understood by the weavers. 
 So violent was the opposition made to its introduction that he was compelled to leave 
 Lyons in order to save his life. The Conseil des Prudhommes broke up his machines 
 in the public places, and Jacquard was delivered over to universal ignominy. But 
 after some years had passed the machine proved to be of the greatest value, and on 
 the spot where the model was destroyed a statue to Jacquard now stands. He died 
 August 7th, 1834. in Quillins, near Lyons, at 82 years of age. At the time of his 
 death over 30,000 Jacquard machines were in operation in his native city. 
 
The Jacquard Machine.— General Arrangement and 
 
 Application. 
 
 If a fabric contains a great number of ends of warp bound differently in the 
 filling, the method of guiding the warp by harness frames is too cumbrous and 
 inefficient ; in such cases it becomes necessary to use the Jacquard machine for 
 raising the warp-threads separately by means of hook and leash. 
 
 The hooks as used for raising leash, mail, lingo, and warp-thread, consist of 
 wires 16 to 17 inches long, with a crook on each end. On the lower crook is 
 fastened the leash by means of the neck-cord. 
 
 The cords of each leash are threaded through the holes of the comber-board ; 
 the latter are separated from each other according to the texture of the warp in 
 reed. 
 
 On the harness-cords are adjusted the heddles, (either twine or wire), on which 
 are fastened the lingoes as weights. In the mails of the heddles are drawn the 
 warp- threads. 
 
 Now, from the foregoing explanations, it will be apparent that by raising the 
 hook in the Jacquard machine we raise the leash, and the latter raises every warp- 
 thread throughout the fabric for interlacing with the filling. 
 
 The next point required to be known is, which hooks are to be raised, and 
 which are to be lowered ? To regulate this, a design (pattern) is prepared in which 
 the floating of the warp over the filling is indicated. 
 
 For the warp-threads required to be raised holes are punched in the cards. In 
 these holes the points of the needles extending through the needle-board are pushed 
 by a spring fastened on the rear of each needle. The needles are adjusted in rows 
 of different heights. The arrangements most used are 4, 8, and 12 rows high. 
 Each row as to height in the machine contains a bar (knife) in the griffe. When the 
 griffe is down, or the machine at rest, the upper crooks of the hooks are raised 
 about half an inch above the griffe -bars. 
 
 The needles which control the position of the hooks, permitting them to rise or 
 compelling them to remain stationary, are pressed by the springs fastened in the 
 rear towards the cards, which are moved on a quadrilateral and perforated cylinder. 
 This cylinder performs a movement similar to a pendulum towards the points of the 
 needles. Any needle for which a hole was punched in the card will penetrate the 
 cylinder; consequently, the corresponding hook will remain in its natural position, 
 ■ ••• the crook over the corresponding griffe-bar, and upon lifting the griffe the hook 
 will be raised. 
 
 Again, needles for which no holes are punched in the cards will be thrust back 
 by moving the cylinder containing the cards towards the needle-board ; this motion 
 
 9 
 
10 
 
 forces back the corresponding hooks, pushing them away from the griffe-bars above, 
 and upon raising the griffe they will remain stationary ; hence, if a blank card were 
 pressed against all the needles of any machine, the entire number of needles the 
 machine contains would be pushed back, and none of the hooks would come in 
 contact with the griffe-bars, and, consequently, raising the griffe would produce an 
 empty lift. On the other hand, using a card having every hole of the cylinder 
 punched, (or the empty cylinder used), would lift every needle in the machine. 
 Pressing the needles towards the rear compresses the springs ; these will again 
 expand as soon as the cylinder leaves the needle-board. The hooks, which were left 
 standing in their position over the griffe-bars are caught by the latter at the raising 
 of the griffe. The elevation of these hooks raises the leashes fastened to them, 
 thus causing the lifted warp-threads to form a shed with those not lifted. 
 
 Jacquard machines are made of different sizes and descriptions, some having 
 only a few hooks and others a large number. The sizes most often used are ioo, 
 200, 400, 600, 900, 1200 hooks. The number or size is always indicated by the 
 number of needles and hooks which it contains, without counting the reserve rows, 
 of which there are generally two. These reserve rows are used for various purposes, 
 such as raising- the selvedge; raising the front harness ; raising- the shuttle-boxes on 
 hand-looms ; guiding the take-up motion on hand-looms ; indicating a certain card 
 through ringing a bell on hand-looms, etc. 
 
 Sometimes a few of the needles and hooks from the reserve are added to the 
 main part of the needles and hooks. For example : Take a design in which the 
 ground weave repeats on 12 ends ; working a 400 machine, we find: 
 
 400 -^ 12 = 33 repeats of the weave, less 4 hooks; 
 
 Consequently, if this ground-weave is repeated all over the width of the fabric, 
 we must use either : 
 
 396 hooks, leaving 4 hooks more to be added to the two rows already used ; or 408 hooks, 
 requiring us to call upon the reserve rows for eight extra hooks. 
 
 Hooks which have no leashes adjusted must be taken out of the machine. 
 
 Sometimes two, three, or more, machines are employed on one loom, and 
 may be worked in different manners. In this country Jacquard machines, for power 
 as well as hand-looms, are made of iron, whereas in Europe the machines for hand- 
 looms (comprising the greater part of the Jacquard machines in use) are made of 
 wood; using the iron ones only for power-looms; and even yet, in most cases, the 
 wooden machines are used for the latter. 
 
11 
 
 Illustrations of the Different Parts of the 
 
 Jacquard Machine.— Method 
 
 of Operation, etc. 
 
 Every Jacquard machine may be divided into the follow 
 ing parts : 
 
 i. The Frame and the Perforated Board through which 
 the neck-cords are passed. 
 
 2. The Griffe and necessary attachments for lifting the 
 same. 
 
 3. The Hooks. 
 
 4. The Needles. 
 
 5. The Springs and Spring Frame. 
 
 6. The Needle-board. 
 
 7. The Cylinder, Hammer, 
 and Batten. 
 
 8. The Catches. 
 
 9. The Cards. 
 10. The Jacquard Harness. 
 
 THE FRAME. 
 
 Fig. I.,* represents the side 
 view of the " frame " of a common 200 
 Jacquard machine by a, b, c, d. The width 
 of the frame in its main part [see 6 to 7] 
 is €) l /2 inches. 
 
 iyi inches is the width of the iron cast- 
 ing at the places marked 8 and 9. 
 
 2 inches is the height of casting at the 
 place indicated by 1. 
 
 \]4 inches is the height of casting at the 
 place indicated by 3. 
 
 1 y± inches is the height of casting at the 
 place indicated by 5. 
 
 The open part of the frame, 
 marked 2 in drawing, is 6 inches 
 high. 
 
 Fie. T. 
 
 *For illustration of the present article a 200 Jacquard machine is used, illustrated on pages 11-17 by Figs. I. to XT., 
 which contains the same principles of construction as any other size machine. These illustrations are drawn one-fourth of the 
 actual size ; hence, any measures, etc., we have omitted may readily be found by any student. 
 
12 
 
 The open part of the frame, marked 4 in drawing, is 5 inches high. Hence, 
 the main height of the frame is as follows : 
 
 1 = 2 inches. 
 2=6 " 
 
 3=i^ " 
 
 4 = 5 
 
 5 = i# " 
 
 1 6 ' 4. inches main height. 
 
 
 THE PERFORATED BOARD. 
 The perforated bottom board, through which the neck-cords are passed, contains 
 one hole for every hook in the machine, and is illustrated in Fig. II. separately. It 
 shows the following measurements : 
 
 Entire width of board = 8 inches, 
 length " =12 " 
 
 Thickness " = ^ 
 
 „. r , , , , ( a, in length of board, 0.27 inch. (See /to 6.) 
 
 Distance of holes from each centre, s . . & ' 
 
 I 0, in width " y % " (See 111 to w.) 
 
 " first row from the part of the frame illustrated in Fig. I., 2^ inches. 
 
 . " " " " rear part of the frame, 2^4 inches. 
 
 This board is fastened by screws to the frame at places indicated in Fig. I. by 
 1 1 and 12. 
 
 THE PLUNGER. 
 Besides the frame, Fig. I. illus- 
 trates: Under I. the Jacquard plunger, 
 Y^ inch diameter, for guiding the griffe 
 (attached to its head) when raising. To 
 strengthen the steadiness of this latter 
 movement shoulders are attached to the 
 frame at the three places where the 
 plunger slides. 
 
 Height of frame at k, = 2^ inches. 
 /, = 2 
 
 m _ 2 .. Fig. II. 
 
 Screws, f, dotted in drawing, on head of plunger, fasten the griffe to it. 
 
 Part III. in Fig. I. illustrates the attachment for providing the lifting of the 
 plunger in a hand-loom, likewise the griffe, etc. This consists of a triangular 
 shaped frame 14^ inches high, or less, according to height of room. This part is 
 fastened to the front part of the frame by bolts at and /. In the slot at the top, 
 between r and s, a wooden cylinder of 2>% inches diameter is fastened to an iron 
 shaft resting in the frame at /. 
 
 At 13 a leather strap is fastened to this cylinder and to the plunger 14. 
 It will easily be seen that by turning the wooden cylinder in the direction ol 
 the arrows, 15, the plunger will be raised with the griffe fastened to its top. By 
 
13 
 
 reversing the action of the cylinder, the plunger and griffe will return to their 
 previous positions. The action thus described constitutes a "single lift," raising 
 and lowering of plunger and griffe for each pick. 
 
 THE CATCHES. 
 
 At IV., Fig. I., the "catches" for turning the cylinder at the lantern are illus- 
 trated. The distance of the centre of the screws which hold the catches to the 
 frame is 4^ inches. Between these two catches the cylinder is adjusted to the 
 batten, and the direction of its turning is regulated by the catch which is brought 
 in contact with the lantern. If the 
 
 ^ 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 I) 
 
 K 
 
 — 1 
 
 catch, y, turns, the cylinder will turn 
 
 the card situated on its top towards 
 
 the needle-board, and if catch, s, is 
 
 brought into contact with the lantern, 
 
 the card hanging below the needle- 
 board will be the next in turn to be 
 
 pushed towards the needles. 
 
 (r? The entire length of the 
 
 catches in the present illustra- 
 tion is 8 ins., allowing 53^ ins. FlG - m - 
 for the catch itself and 2^ ins. for the part to which it is fastened. Making 
 this catch in two pieces is preferable to the old style of one piece, because 
 the moment of turning the cylinder can be more easily regulated. 
 
 THE GRIFFE. 
 
 Fig. III. illustrates the top view of the griffe. As 
 mentioned before, the griffe is fastened to the plunger , / ,(7 A Jl ,f? J@ 
 
 by means of screws. In the drawing the dark shaded t 
 places marked f are the hollow places in the griffe, Fig. iv. 
 
 through which the screws fasten the latter to the plunger. The griffe, like the 
 other parts explained, is made of cast iron, and the machine is of the fol- 
 
 lowing dimensions 
 
 inches. 
 
 Fig. V. 
 
 Length of griffe, a to b, = 9^4 
 
 Depth " " a to c, = 6% 
 
 Extension on each side, e to /, = 1^ " 
 
 Distance of griffe-bars, s to s, = 7/ % " 
 
 Length " " m to 11, = q]/± " 
 
 Height " " [see Fig. IV. , sectional cut of griffe-bars,] 
 
 THE HOOK. 
 
 inch. 
 
 Fig. V. represents a hook as used in the present machine, made of No. \2>% 
 bright spring wire. Height, a to c, = i6S^ inches. Height of rester, b to c, — 6^4 
 inches. 
 
14 
 
 I 
 
 THE NEEDLE. 
 
 Fig. VI. illustrates a needle, as used in connection with the hook. Distance 
 
 from head to loop, 9^ inches, = a to c. t 
 
 Length of loop, i^j» inches, = ^ to af. 10^ * 
 
 inches entire length. Fie. vi. 
 
 The distance from head to eye (for passing through the hook) is regulated 
 according to the row in which the needle belongs. In the present illustration this is, 
 Head to eye, = 7 inches, = a to b. The eye, = }{ inch, = b. 
 
 Eight different positions of the distance of the eye from head will be required 
 by an 8-row machine. The needles are made of No. 1 5 3. < bright spring wire. 
 The loop on the end, c to d, permits a pin to be inserted, [see Fig. VII., o~\, and also 
 holds the needle in position. 
 
 Fig. VII. gives a clear understanding of the arrangement of hooks, needles, 
 griffe-bars, springs, frame for holding the latter, and the needle board. This draw 
 
 ing is in accordance with the preceding 
 ones, executed one-fourth of the actual 
 size, and represents the sectional cut of one 
 cross-row in the Jacquard machine contain- 
 ing 8 hooks, (as it is an 8-row deep machine 
 which we explain) : e to <?', 1st hook. ; /"to 
 /', 2d hook ; g to g', 3d hook ; h to //', 4th 
 hook; i to i\ 5th hook; k to k', 6th hook ; 
 / to /', 7th hook ; m to m', 8th hook. These 
 hooks are held in their required places by 
 the eyes of the needles [see place v at hook 
 1], through which the former are passed. 
 
 The needles rest with their heads in 
 the needle-board, a to b, extending out- 
 side, towards the cylinder, for about y 2 
 inch. The rear part of the needle — the 
 loop — is passed between two bars of 
 the spring frame, n, p, and held by the 
 latter firmly, but with sufficient play for a 
 longitudinal motion for pressing towards 
 their springs. The pin, 0, is inserted for 
 holding the springs in their places. One 
 pin is required for each vertical row of 
 needles. The part of the spring frame, 
 r, n, />, s, unshaded, is made of cast iron ; the shaded part (extension) is constructed 
 of wood. Below the upper crook of the hooks, the black sections represent a sec- 
 tional cut of the griffe-bars ; v to w indicates the rester for the lower hooks, which 
 keeps the latter in their required position. 
 
 A study of this illustration will show that when the heads of the needles, a-b, 
 
 
15 
 
 are pushed backwards, in the direction of arrows, the hooks are also moved. If the 
 needles are not pushed, the upper crooks of the hooks will remain in position, as in 
 drawing, over the griffe-bar ; and raising the latter will consequently raise every 
 one of these hooks. Therefore, if a blank card is pressed against the 208 needles 
 of the machine, all the needles and hooks will be pushed back, out of the way of 
 contact with the griffe-bars, thus causing an empty lift when they are raised ; 
 whereas, by pressing with an empty cylinder, or with a card, containing as many 
 holes as the machine has needles, and so placed that the holes are exactly opposite 
 the needles, none of them would be moved, and each hook would remain vertical 
 over its griffe-bar ; and raising the griffe will lift every hook. 
 
 As mentioned before, the springs, 11, are attached to the needles between the 
 needle-frame, n-p, and the pin, 0. Fig. VI., the distance e to f indicates the part of 
 the loop around which the spring is adjusted, and where it rests against the 
 expansion of the loop, f, in Fig. VI., represents the place where pin, o, (as shown 
 in Fig. VII.) passes through the loop and is fastened to the needle-frame on top and 
 bottom. Pressing the needle at the head compresses the spring, as the latter is 
 securely fastened on one end by the wider part of the loop, and on the other end 
 by a pin inserted in the loop and fastened to the frame. Remove the pressure at 
 the head of the needle, and the spring will return to its natural position, pushing 
 the needle into its old place. These springs are made of thin brass wire. 
 
 It is necessary to keep the needle-eyes in the proper place, otherwise it 
 would result in bending the hook out of its perpendicular position, and by 
 lowering the griffe its bars would possibly come in contact with the head of 
 the hook, crushing the latter, or doing more damage if not detected at once. Each 
 needle or hook, if worn out, can be replaced by pulling out the pin, 0, thus loosening 
 the needle and giving a chance to work the required hook out of the needle-eye. 
 
 THE BATTEN MOTION. 
 
 Fig. VIII. represents the batten 
 motion to be attached to the guiding- 
 rod, [see No. 14, in Fig. I.], and the 
 frame, [see No. 16, in Fig. I.] The 
 batten, 2, is connected to a triangular 
 lever by means of lever, d. Another 
 vertical lever connects the lower part of 
 this triangular lever to a projecting bolt, 
 k, fixed to the guiding-rod of the griffe. 
 By raising the guiding-rod, thus raising lever, k, in the direction of the arrow, the 
 batten is thrown outwards, [see direction of arrow below c], returning again to its 
 former position at the lowering of the griffe. f indicates the place where the 
 triangular lever is fastened (movable) to the projecting bolt, extending out of the 
 frame, a indicates the place for the cylinder. Part 1 of the batten is movable at / 
 in the direction of arrow, s, allowing the cylinder to be inserted. Part 1 is fastened 
 (after putting the cylinder in at a), to 2 by means of the screw, n. 
 
 Fig. VIII. 
 
16 
 
 THE CYLINDER. 
 
 Fig. IX. represents the cylinder, with the lantern for turning the same by 
 means of the catches. The dimensions for the cylinder in the present machine are 
 as follows : 
 
 = 2 finches. 
 = i 
 
 
 Height of cylinder, 
 Width " 
 
 " " lantern, 
 Average length of spindle, = 2 " 
 
 This cylinder is carried in the batten, the latter moving in the groove provided 
 for it under 10, Fig. I. This batten has sufficient vibratory motion to enable it 
 
 » 'm •*-*-' •"•*#* 
 
 .••W.V.*. 
 
 ^>v>>>>>;->v>>>>>:->v>>.%«.-.v' 
 
 ' i 
 
 •••••••••••••••••••••••••a 
 
 ••••••••••••••••••••••••a* 
 
 «»o«eoooso««ec»«* •«««••• 
 J - 
 
 eoe»9oo90«»»<>c<»oeo99«oo»9o 
 
 QSp 
 
 Fig. IX. 
 
 to move the required distance away from the needle-board. After 
 contact with the catch it still moves until the cylinder has performed a complete 
 turn. The cylinder is steadied in the required position by the hammer pressing by 
 the means of a spring towards the lantern from below. 
 
 THE HAMMER. 
 Fig. X. illustrates the hammer as attached to the batten ; a to b, (equals 3 
 inches in width in our present illustration), represents the head of the hamnvr, 
 forming the foundation for steadying the cylinder in its turning. The 
 hammer is pressed for this purpose towards the cylinder by means of 
 1C the spring, s to r. Parts h and k guide the hammer in its up and down 
 movements, and are solid parts of the batten. By turning the cylinder 
 the hammer is pushed down in the direction of the arrow, /, thus com- 
 pressing the spring, which returns to its normal position after the 
 cylinder has completed its turn, ready for being advanced towards the 
 needle-board. 
 
 The following are accurate measurements of this part of the 
 machine : 
 
 Height of head of hammer at a and b, = % inch. 
 Thickness of hammer-head, e to c, = % " 
 
 Height of hammer-head when at rest 
 
 above the top guiding part, c to <?, = 
 Width of the guiding-rod, c to d, = 
 
 Thickness of " top guide,"/" to g, = 
 
 " "lower guide," fta r, = 
 
 Distance between these guides, = 
 
 Total height of guiding-rod, = 
 
 1/2 
 
 1/ 
 
 Fig. X. 
 
 
17 
 
 The shaded part of the drawing above the hammer represents the cylinder, i, 
 which has its shaft for turning at m. 
 
 THE NEEDLE-BOARD. 
 As before mentioned, the heads of the needles are passed through the needle- 
 board. A drawing of this board, representing the front view, is shown in Fig. XI. 
 
 The following are the dimensions : 
 a to c, = g*4 inches, a to b, = 2^ inches. 
 Each side of the prism, always technically called 
 fig. xi. the cylinder, has a protruding peg about y 2 inch 
 
 in length. When in contact with the needle-board these pegs enter the black holes 
 shown upon either side in drawing. The 208 needles and holes in the present machine 
 are represented by a small spot for the former with an outside ring for the latter. 
 
 The lifting of the griffe, which in turn 
 also operates the other parts of the Jac- 
 quard head, as explained before, is not 
 always produced from above : very often 
 this lifting is arranged to be done by means 
 of a lever arrangement from below the 
 griffe. This method of working the mech- 
 anism in the Jacquard machine is illustrated 
 by Fig. XII., representing the perspective 
 view of a 400 Jacquard machine, ( W. P. 
 Uhlinger, builder). 
 
 Fig. xii. 
 
 Fig. XIII. represents the 
 same machine adjusted to 
 the loom. On the longer 
 arm of the lever a series of 
 holes are found. These 
 regulate the height of the 
 lift by the vertical rod 
 which provides the required 
 movement. The nearer this 
 rod is adjusted to the Jac- 
 quard head the higher the 
 lift of the Jacquard harness, 
 thus forming the shed. 
 
 THE JACQUARD CARDS. 
 
 Fig. XIV. represents a 
 single Jacquard card, as re- 
 quired for the 200 Jacquard 
 
18 
 
 3 
 
 ,0 * 
 
 *0' 
 
 Fig. XV. 
 
 machine, ^ of its actual size. This shows 26 rows of holes in its width and 8 rows 
 in its depth, 208 holes. These holes are shown in black, one for each hook in 
 
 the machine. Besides these a large hole on 
 each side permit the pegs of the cylinder to enter 
 into the needle- board. The cards are interlaced 
 in an endless arrangement. 
 Fig. xiv. Fig. XV. illustrates four cards laced together. 
 
 The large holes (marked d in drawing) are peg holes to receive the pegs, 
 //, h\ h", h"\ etc., of the cylinder, as shown in Fig. IX. These pegs are movable 
 so that any small variations at cutting with different card-stamping machines can be 
 rectified. The paper used for the cards 
 must be of sufficient thickness to resist 
 the wear caused by the needles, as well 
 as to give steadiness to the cards when 
 resting in the pegs of the cylinder. 
 
 The cards are interlaced in an 
 endless arrangement ; hence, one card 
 is brought after the other in rotation 
 towards the needles. The cards only 
 refuse service by not fitting properly on the cylinder, i. e., if the peg holes are too 
 near together or too far apart ; or if the cards are warped, which is liable to happen 
 in a damp workshop. 
 
 A careful examination of the cards fitting on the cylinder is absolutely necessary, 
 otherwise a wrong lifting of the hooks destroying the cards by the pegs punching new 
 holes would result. The cylinder with cards perfectly cut must be set so as to allow 
 the needles to penetrate into the centre of the holes stamped for them in the card. 
 Sometimes the cylinder is set too high or too low — too far in front or too far in rear. 
 To ascertain the proper position, lift the machine and place some paint, or grease 
 from the machine, on the heads of the needles. Afterwards let the machine 
 "fall in," which will bring the cards against the heads of the needles, producing 
 an impression and indicating the exact position of the needle-heads. The cylinder 
 
 is always set in its proper position when no marks 
 are made by the entering needles on the margins 
 of the stamped holes and where there are no 
 holes the impression left by the needle head must 
 be equally distant from the surrounding holes. 
 To get a clear understanding of this examine 
 Fig. XVI. illustrating six different impressions 
 of the needles. The circle shown with full lines 
 in each of these six illustrations represents the 
 correct position of the circumference of the hole, 
 and the dotted circles the various errors that may 
 exist. 
 
 
 Fig. XVI. 
 
19 
 
 Fig. A shows the cylinder set in its proper place, which is indicated by the 
 impression of the needle in the centre. 
 
 Fig. B shows the cylinder is set too high, as indicated by the impression of the 
 needle. [See arrow.] 
 
 In Fig. C the cylinder is set too low. 
 
 In Fig. D the cylinder is set too far to the left. 
 
 In Fig. E the cylinder is set too far to the right. 
 
 In Fig. F the cylinder is set too low and too far to the right. 
 
 In Fig. G the cylinder is set too low and too far to the left. 
 
 In Fig. H the cylinder is set too high and too far to the left. 
 
 In Fig. K the cylinder is set too high and too far to the right. 
 
 If the machine produces wrong lifts of the hooks and the trouble is not found 
 in the setting of the cylinder, nor in the hooks or needles, then ascertain if the 
 
 -m a AJi- 
 
 :ftJJ 
 
 .v ,S t * jft t» t- «'- t* / p- 
 
 t.Vy 
 
 MiiiMiMiim / 
 
 Milliliilij ii'L/ 
 
 V \l \/ V V V \l 
 
 Fig. XVII. 
 
 cylinder is adjusted by means of the lever arrangement, close enough to the needle- 
 board ; for if it is not, the hooks will not be pushed far enough from the griffe-bars, 
 and by raising the latter a wrong shed will be produced. When using a great 
 number of cards in a set they are made to fold into a " rack." This is done by 
 attaching a wire i to i}£ inches longer than the cards at the junction of, say every 
 1 2th, 15th, or 20th cards. [See c at Fig. XV.] 
 
 The cards fall through a wooden frame, Fig. XVII., but the wires attached 
 to the cards, being longer, can not pass through, and the cards will remain suspended, 
 and subsequently fold together in a very compact manner. 
 
 In Fig. XVII. we illustrate 156 cards arranged with wires atttached to every 
 twelfth card, as follows: between cards 156 and 1, 12 and 13, 24 and 25, 36 and 
 $7, 48 and 49, 60 and 61, 72 and y$, 84 and 85, 96 and 97, 108 and 109, 120 and 
 121, 132 and 133, 144 and 145. 
 
20 
 
 At e,f,g, are shown prisms of the size of the cylinder, by which the cards are 
 guided and regulated in their run towards the cylinder, (direction of arrow) ; i and k 
 represent round rollers, also placed in rack for guiding cards after leaving the 
 cylinder, c ; a and b, the needle-board ; c and d, the needles of the machine. 6" 
 represents the wires as inserted in cards for holding them in the frame. 
 
 THE JACQUARD HARNESS. 
 
 To the lower end of the hooks (c. in Fig. V.) the neck-cords are adjusted. The 
 latter are passed separately through one of the corresponding holes of the perforated 
 bottom board (Fig. II.) To these neck-cords are fastened the leashes of the Jacquard 
 harness about l / 2 to i inch above the frame containing the rods which guide the 
 neck-cords vertically as the hooks are raised and lowered. The different harness- 
 cords are threaded through the comber-board in various ways called "Tie-ups," 
 which will be explained later. 
 
 The Comber-board and Methods of Figuring for it. 
 
 There are two kinds of comber-boards used upon Jacquard looms: 
 ist. Comber-boards made of a solid piece of material, either wood or porcelain. 
 2d. Comber-boards made in strips of either of the materials above named, and 
 adjusted afterwards in a wooden frame. 
 
 Comber-boards Made of a Solid Piece of Material. 
 
 Before ordering a comber-board, it is necessary to know the texture of the 
 fabric in the loom, and also the number or size of the machine to be used ; for the 
 number of holes per inch in the comber-board is regulated by this. Afterwards, we 
 may, if we choose, arrange the number of holes in depth of the comber-board, 
 according to the number of griffe-bars in the machine, (guided by the fabric to be 
 made). We may have eight griffe-bars in the machine, and arrange the comber- 
 board 4, 6, 8, io, 12 rows deep ; or we may have 12 griffe-bars in the machine, and 
 arrange the comber-board 12, 10, 8, 6, 4 rows deep. 
 
 Rule: The number of holes to one inch in the comber-board must equal the 
 texture of the fabric to one inch in loom. 
 
 Example: Suppose a fabric with a texture in the loom of 100 threads, and we are 
 to use a 600 Jacquard machine, with 1 2 rows. The width of the fabric in the loom is 
 to be 36 inches. 
 
 Required: The number of holes in the width of the comber-board. 
 
 Answer: 100 x 36 = 3600 holes in the comber-board. 
 
 3600 -r- 12 = 300, the number of holes in width. 
 
 The width and depth of the comber-board are regulated by the width of the clo 
 required and by the design to be used. 
 
 The greater the number of rows in depth the closer they must be ; the same is 
 true of the width. 
 
 
21 
 
 It is necessary to take care not to have the comber-board too deep, as the 
 consequence would be a bad shed; furthermore, we must not have the holes too 
 close together, as in a high texture this would make trouble in the weaving through 
 the catching of the heddles with the warp, and also cause useless chafing of the warp- 
 threads and the heddles. 
 
 The Changing of Solid Comber-boards for Different Textures. 
 
 In Jacquard work we generally use the same texture, or as near as possible, as 
 the loom is tied up for; but changes are sometimes unavoidable. If we reduce the 
 texture of the fabric in a Jacquard loom tied-up for a solid comber-board, we must 
 reduce proportionally the number of hooks and needles used in designing, and hence 
 the number of heddles used per inch. These heddles will thus be left empty when 
 drawing in the warp. v To accomplish this lift the full machine and throw the hooks not 
 to be used from the knives, lowering in this way every mail which is not to be used. 
 Sometimes there may be only one, two, three, or four hooks to be thrown off, on 
 account of the design. At other times it may be necessary that one-eighth, or one- 
 fourth, or even one-half of the whole number shall be dropped for this purpose. For 
 instance, suppose we have a dressgoods design of 596 threads and a 600 machine. 
 These four ends left off the 600, if in 6, 7, 8, or more inches in width, would not affect 
 the fabric nor the cost to any great extent; hence we may leave out the first or last 
 four needles of the 600. 
 
 Suppose we have a texture of 100 in the comber-board, to lower to 66 ends 
 per inch. 66 ends, or the nearest even part of 100 (66^) is 2 /^ of 100; hence, we 
 only need two-thirds of our machine; and as the same is supposed to be arranged 
 12 rows deep, we need ^ of 12 rows, or 8 rows. The four rows thus found 
 necessary to drop may be dropped from the ends, or alternately, as follows : 
 
 Every alternate 2 rows taken, 1 row missed, 4 times over, = 1 2 rows. Or, 2 
 rows missed, 8 rows taken, 2 rows missed, = 12 rows. 
 
 Comber-boards made in Strips and Adjusted afterwards in a Frame. 
 
 By these comber-boards which are used to a great advantage on narrow loom 
 work up to 36 inch fabrics, we can change the texture for the fabric ; for the strips 
 composing the comber-board may be drawn apart, thus changing the higher texture 
 to lower ; whereas in a solid comber-board this could only be done by re-tying the 
 harness or changing the number of needles used in the machine. To give a clear 
 understanding Figs. XVIII., XIX., XX. are needed. 
 
 Fig. XVIII. represents an 8-row deep comber-board, a, b, c, d, composed of 
 10 strips which are set close together. By examining each strip 5 cross-rows of 
 holes will be found, making the whole number of holes 400. 
 
 Suppose the comber-board as represented in Fig. XVIII. is intended for a 
 texture of 100 ends per inch ; this will give for the width of the fabric (i, k, to /, m,) 
 4 inches. 
 
22 
 
 In Fig. XIX. the comber-board is arranged for a texture of half as many ends, 
 or 50 holes per inch, and the 10 strips are arranged accordingly ; the empty places 
 
 Fig. XIX. 
 
 e 
 
 v 
 
 
 ' i ' 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 >i 
 
 
 '.»' 
 
 
 • t ■ 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 ' e 
 
 
 '9.' 
 
 
 10. 
 
 A. 
 
 .»c 
 
 Fig. XVIII. 
 
 between the strips are of same size as the strips themselves, and the fabric design 
 below the comber-board is arranged to correspond. 
 
 Fig. XX. illustrates the sectional cut of the comber-board used in 
 
 & 
 
 1 O drawings, Figs. XVIII. and XIX., and the letters indicating the dif- 
 Fig. xx. ferent parts of these figures which correspond. 
 
 Divisions of the Comber-board. 
 
 Under this heading we classify one repeat of the arrangement of threading 
 harness-cords in the comber-board, and therefore one repeat of the design of 
 the fabric. We find fabrics in which are used one or more divisions of one 
 system of threading harness-cords in the comber-board ; again, there are 
 others in which one or more divisions of one system are combined with one 
 or more divisions of another, or even of two or three other systems. 
 
 Heddles for the Jacquard Harness. 
 
 4.U„ 
 
 After the harness-cords are threaded through the comber-board the 
 heddles are adjusted. Of these there are two kinds : 
 
 A. The twine heddle, containing the mail for holding the warp-thread. 
 
 B. The wire heddle, similar in its construction to the regular heddle, 
 used in the common harness-loom. These are very little used, and only in 
 fabrics of a low texture. 
 
 Fig. XXI. illustrates a regular twine heddle one-fourth of its actual size. 
 b represents the mail, through the eye of which the warp-threads are 
 passed. 
 
 a, the adjustment of the heddle to the harness-cord. 
 ;. xxi. c indicates part of the lingo for weighting the heddle. 
 
 
23 
 
 y 
 
 3 
 
 Fig. XXIII. 
 
 Fig-. XXII. illustrates the method observed for combining heddle and harness- 
 cords, a, the guide-board, to get the mails regular in height ; b, the knot combining 
 heddle and harness-cord. [See a in Fig. XXL] c, the mail, d. 
 the lingo. 
 
 Fie. XXIII. illustrates the average 
 
 position of the mail in a loom, a, breast- 
 
 beam of the loom, c, the warp-beam or x 
 guide-beam over which the warp runs 
 on its way towards the harness, b, the 
 position of the heddle. d, the lingo. 
 
 The "Leasing" of the Harness. 
 
 This requires a clear conception of the rotation in which the 
 different heddles are threaded, according to the tie-up employed. 
 Two methods are in use : ist. The heddle nearest the weaver is 
 the first to be threaded, and the heddle of the same row in rear of 
 the comber-board is the last. 2d. This principle reversed, thus 
 arranging the leasing from rear to front. 
 
 The latter method is the one most generally observed. Every 
 row in depth of comber-board is leased separately, and in rotation 
 secured to the lease-twines, a and b, in Fig. XXIV., thus forming an 
 uninterrupted line of heddles through the entire Jacquard harness. 
 Throuo-h these heddles the warp is afterwards drawn in rotation. 
 
 Fig. XXII. 
 
 TYING-UP OF JACQUARD HARNESS. 
 1. The Straight-Through Tie-up. 
 
 Fig. XXIV. 
 
 This tie-up contains in its principle the foundation of all the others. Three 
 methods are in common use, which we will now explain. 
 
 ist. The Jacquard Harness threaded on the machine in the direction from Front to Rear. 
 
 This tie-up is represented in Fig. XXV. 
 
 As mentioned in the heading of this article, the Jacquard harness, or the 
 leashes, are fastened to the machine in rotation from front to rear, the threading of 
 the comber-board being done from rear to front. The comber-board is in three 
 divisions. The machine used for illustrating is a 400 Jacquard 8-row machine, and 
 the comber-board used is also 8 rows deep. This method of tying-up of the 
 leashes forms what is technically known as "open harness." As the drawing is 
 designed to explain a 400 machine, 8 rows drawn in the comber-board, also 8 rows 
 deep, one row in height of the cylinder will equal one row in depth on the comber- 
 board. In examining the illustration the eye must follow the line connecting the 
 
lkui.si.6rv. 
 
25 
 
 numbers on the neck-cords to the corresponding numbers near the holes on the 
 comber-board. If this be done, the tie-up will readily explain itself. It will also 
 explain the method of procedure if 
 a machine is used containing' a dif- 
 ferent number of needles and hooks, 
 and a comber-board having as many 
 rows in depth as there are griffe- 
 bars in the machine. For example, 
 a 600 machine, with 12 griffe-bars, 
 needs for this tie-up a comber-board « 
 12 rows deep ; and a 200 machine, 
 with 8 griffe-bars, requires a comber- 
 board 8 rows deep, etc., etc. 
 
 The drawing shows a comber- 
 board with 3 divisions, each division 
 furnishing one harness-cord to each 
 neck-cord, making in all three har- 
 ness-cords to every neck-cord. The 
 same tie-up will apply should the 
 drawing contain a different number 
 of divisions. The illustration shows 
 only the first and last rows of each 
 division in the comber-board, and 
 also the first and last rows of neck- 
 cords. 
 
 The design below the drawing 
 represents a damask fabric to be 
 executed on this tie-up, requiring 
 the whole number of needles for one 
 repeat of the pattern of 400 threads. 
 In designing for these tie-ups it is 
 necessary to arrange the design 
 to repeat itself in the number of 
 needles that will be used in pro- 
 ducing the fabric. The first and last threads must connect with each other, without 
 interruption, forming a continuous design over all the divisions. Thus we find, in 
 fabric design of a damask towel, Fig. XXVI., the repeat (division) from A to B. 
 In the centre of the design marked a, and the main part of the border marked c, we 
 find one repeat ; whereas borders b and b' repeat 8 times. 
 
 In the fabric illustrated by design, Fig. XXVII., again a damask towel, the 
 repeat, or one division, is also indicated by A to B. The centre of the fabric, a, 
 repeats twice in one division ; borders b and b' repeat four times in the same distance; 
 whereas the main design of the border indicated by c requires one complete division. 
 
 ~ *p, ■**- : " *** '"^ ' aK ^T- ■ #ag — '•'• ""— 
 
 %smm%mzm@m 
 
 1 ^{/~Ar~!fir^*r~+<^"~/iZZ&ttitt i yz 
 
 Fig. XXVI. 
 
26 
 
 f !*a 
 
 
 
 iSRftSKf 
 
 s&i^a/iNiaKi^sw^s 
 
 Fig. XXVII. 
 2d. The Jacquard Harness threaded on the machine from Rear to Front. 
 
 This is the second method for the straight-through tie-up, and is illustrated in 
 Fig. XXVIII. The Jacquard harness is fastened to the machine, at the neck-cords, 
 from rear to front. The threading of the comber-board is also from rear to front. 
 In this method the work of attaching the leashes to the neck-cords is commenced in 
 the rear instead of the front of the machine, thus giving a different view and 
 arrangement of the tie-up. This disposition of the threads is called a "sectional 
 harness arrangement." 
 
 The illustration shows a 400 Jacquard or 8-row machine, in connection with an 
 8-row deep comber-board, with one row in the comber-board requiring a 
 corresponding row on the face of the cylinder. It will also explain the method of 
 procedure with this tie-up in Jacquard machines with comber-boards of different sizes. 
 
 Fig. XXIX. represents the perforated board at the bottom of the machine 
 through which the neck-cords pass, attaching the leash to the neck-cords. The first 
 row, containing neck-cords numbered i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8, and the 50th row, 
 containing those numbered 393, 394, 395, 396, 397, 398, 399, and 400, are the only- 
 ones shown in Fig. XXVIII. illustrating the tie-up. The comber-board is divided 
 
28 
 
 
 a* mS 
 a 'I »'i 
 
 a*« »'f 
 
 • ■ 
 
 • » 
 
 ,/ . ... 
 
 a 9 
 
 • '7 
 
 ip ai* »V »*' ' ir -»— - 
 ly •}( »3j- •J'' • 3i 
 
 • a,sY •«*•«?..-- 
 
 • • att • */ . ... 
 
 • a a a^ - -- 
 
 • • • a yj 
 
 j* . 
 f... 
 
 7 • • 
 
 f . ■ 
 
 into four sections ; hence, the drawing, as represented in Fig. XXVIII., calls for a 
 fabric with 1600 ends in width. 400 ends, or any number dividing into 400, can be 
 used for the repeat of the pattern. The method followed in the illustration may be 
 applied to any size of Jacquard machine, and also to any required number of 
 divisions in the comber-board. 
 
 In ascertaining the number of 
 hooks or needles for one repeat of 
 the design, determine accurately if 
 the repeat of the weave employed 
 for binding tlie ground or the figure 
 divides evenly into this number. 
 For example, take bottom board, 
 Fig. XXIX., calling for 400 hooks 
 and 400 needles. Suppose the 
 ground weave to be an 8-leaf satin, 
 and the design to repeat once in 
 the 400 hooks. 400 -:- 8 — 50! 
 repeats, showing an equal division 
 But suppose a 1 2-leaf satin is used ; 
 it is obvious that 12 is not an even 
 factor of 400, as the division shows 
 a remainder of 4. To dispose of 
 this remainder two methods are 
 open : 
 
 First. Omit last 4 ends and use 
 only 396 hooks, a multiple of 12, 
 giving 11 repeats ; or, 
 
 Second. Add 8 hooks from the 
 reserve rows, elsewhere previously 
 alluded to, thus increasing the num- 
 ber to 408, which is also a multiple I 
 of 12, giving 34 repeats. 
 
 \Z0O /ff , 
 
 ■ «:w »z°i »w 
 
 • 
 
 alio a • a • • 
 a' » a> a • • 
 
 # I ?(■ ■ J V a a a 
 # 3» * « m • 31: a 3>f a' a 
 a- 3 '' m 3 f • 3pm* 'f '•*«« m**7 m. • 
 
 • *« a >ft a 3 ?° a '?7 » >f* »3p m3f¥ a 3p> 
 
 XS X>..x«?. jfT. *».-*». *•? rf'-l Rt»t 
 
 /^ IT /J K '^ X ' J " a" '*■■ 
 
 >r //.- X '«■' 
 
 ^v 
 
 /* - . 
 13 •• 
 /V . . 
 
 /y - . 
 /( • ■ 
 //• • 
 // - • 
 /?. - 
 
 10 • - 
 1/ . • 
 
 11 ' ' 
 ■ii- • 
 i V . . 
 
 ir ' • 
 ■it, ... 
 Lj . . 
 is . . 
 •if « • 
 3t> . • 
 J/ . . 
 )i . . 
 
 3i .. 
 
 3¥. . 
 
 3r. . 
 
 s& . - 
 
 *7 • v 
 3f . . 
 3f . -. 
 *fO ' • 
 HI . . 
 tl . . 
 VS. . 
 V* • . 
 
 "C . . 
 v 7 . ' 
 ff . . 
 
 . S-0 • . 
 t /** 
 
 3d. The Straight-Through Tie-up on 
 the English System. 
 
 The English system, which is 
 widely used, has the Jacquard ma- 
 chine so adjusted upon the loom as 
 to have the cylinder lengthways, 
 running in the same direction as 
 the comber-board ; or, what is the 
 same thing, running in the direction of the width of the fabric. [See Fig. XXX.] 
 The 8 hooks of one cross-row (one hook from each of the 8 griffe-bars) run in the 
 
 Fig. XXIX. 
 
29 
 
 direction from the cloth beam towards the warp beam. Having the same number of 
 rows in depth, in comber-board as there are griffe-bars, one may readily see the 
 advantages of this tie-up. The first row in depth of the comber-board contains 
 harness-cords from neck-cords i to 8. The second row deep of comber-board 
 contains harness-cords from neck- 
 cords 9 to 1 6, finishing each divi- 
 sion on the last (25th) row, with 
 harness-cords from neck-cords 
 193 to 200. 
 
 Should we have a 600 ma- 
 chine, with 12 rows, the comber- 
 board would also have 12 rows, 
 as the 600 machine contains 12 
 griffe-bars. The first row of the 
 comber-board receives the har- 
 ness-cords from Nos. 1 to 12; 
 the second row from Nos. 13 to 
 24, and so on, finishing on the 
 last (50th) row of comber-board 
 with 589 to 600. 
 
 II. Straight-Through Tie-up for 
 
 Repeated Effects, in one 
 
 Repeat of the Design. 
 
 This method of arranging the 
 tying-up of the Jacquard harness 
 is based upon the necessity for 
 producing patterns having a 
 larger number of warp-threads 
 than the Jacquard used has nee- 
 dles. The principle to be ob- 
 served is found in producing 
 small effects which repeat them- 
 selves in the general design. 
 
 The number of cords for the leashes depends upon the frequency with which 
 these repeats occur. Fabrics with stripe effects offer greater opportunities for 
 reducing the number of hooks and needles than other designs. Fig. XXXI. 
 illustrates such a design with its tie-up, using a 400 Jacquard machine with 8 rows. 
 The pattern shows four distinct effects, as follows : 
 
 A, requiring rows 1 to 16, inclusive ; or harness-cords 1 to 128, inclusive. 
 
 B, requiring rows 17 to 21. inclusive; or harness-cords 129 to 168, inclusive. 
 Q requiring rows 22 to 34 ; or harness-cords 169 to 272, inclusive. 
 
 B, requiring rows 35 to 50; or harness-cords 273 to 400, inclusive. 
 
 In this fabric we find 2 full repeats of the design: first, E to F\ second, E" to 
 
 100. 
 
 Fig. XXX. 
 
s 
 
 30 
 
 F", thus requiring two divisions in the comber-board, as indicated by the vertical 
 line between F and E". 
 
 The next subject to consider is the different arrangement of repeated effects in 
 one division. Commence at the left-hand side of the fabric sketch with effect A 
 which repeats only once in one pattern or one division. The illustration shows two 
 divisions, and also that each hook of rows i to 16, inclusive, in the first division can 
 be connected with each hook of rows i to 16, inclusive, in the second division, because 
 these rows produce the same effect in the design, which repeats itself in these two 
 places. This connection forms what is technically called a leash, and it will alway 
 be found that for every harness-cord a leash contains, there will be found a repeat in 
 the design to correspond. 
 
 Effect B is repeated four times in the design, or in each division. By havino- 
 two divisions for the illustration we find that to produce the necessary repeats in 
 the design each hook of rows 17 to 21, inclusive, requires 8 harness-cords to each 
 leash. 
 
 Effect C repeats twice in one pattern or one division. Having two divisions for 
 the illustration, each hook of row 22, including row 34. requires 4 harness-cords to 
 each leash. 
 
 Effect D repeats once in pattern, once in division. This will give a result 
 similar to A, two divisions, row 35, including row 50, with two harness-cords to each 
 leash. This tie-up illustrates the first row of every effect, and also the last leash, 
 400. 
 
 Adding the number of warp-threads in the full repeat of the pattern, we have: 
 
 Effect A = 128 threads. 
 " B-= 40 " 
 
 C= 104 
 " B = 40 
 " D =128 
 " ^=40 •' 
 
 C= 104 
 " B = 40 
 
 624 threads. 
 
 Or, in other words, we are producing with a "straight-through tie-up for repeated 
 effects" on a 400 Jacquard machine, a design, which would require a 600 machine on 
 a common straight-through tie-up, including the two reserve rows, or 624 needles ; 
 in other words, a saving is made of 224 needles in one full repeat of the pattern. 
 
 In designing for looms tied up for similar styles, the repeats of effects must be 
 kept in mind. The general style of every design may be changed, but the 
 arrangement of the repeated effects cannot be altered without changing the entire 
 Jacquard harness. 
 
m 
 
 ains 
 jses 
 
 the 
 i as 
 lard 
 
 ced 
 :ess 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 It 
 
 © 
 so 
 
 t the 
 ured 
 " the 
 
/ 
 / 
 
 / 
 
F", t 
 line b 
 
 one d 
 which 
 divisi' 
 be co 
 these 
 place: 
 be foi 
 the d< 
 
 I 
 two d 
 the d< 
 leash. 
 
 I 
 the ill 
 each 1 
 
 I 
 simila 
 leash. 
 
 400. 
 
 / 
 
 Or, in 
 effect; 
 a con 
 in oth 
 Ii 
 kept 
 arran^ 
 Jacqu 
 
31 
 
 III. Straight-Through Tie-up of a Jacquard Loom having Front Harness Attached. 
 
 As mentioned in the beginning of this work, every Jacquard machine contains 
 two reserve rows, which may be used for various purposes. One of the purposes 
 to which these rows are frequently put is the enlargement of the design of the 
 fabric by using harness on the front of the comber-board, technically known as 
 "front harness." For example, in damask table-cloths, we may use the Jacquard 
 harness for producing the border of the fabric. The centre part may be produced 
 with front harness, forming a checkerboard, or some similar effect. This process 
 may be reversed by designing the 
 centre of the table-cloth for the Jac- 
 quard harness, and the border for the 
 front harness. 
 
 A third method is to design part 
 of the centre and part of the border 
 for the Jacquard harness, the other 
 parts being designed for the front 
 harness. This tie-up is also used to 
 a oreat extent in the manufacture of 
 dressgoods, etc., where stripe effects 
 produced by the front harness, alter- 
 nate with floral or geometrical designs 
 produced by the Jacquard harness. 
 
 In Fig. XXXIII. the centre of a 
 table-cloth cover is shown to further 
 illustrate this method of tying-up. 
 One-half of the width of the design is 
 for the Jacquard harness ; the other 
 half is for the front harness. To pro- 
 duce the required checkerboard effect 
 these front harness are used here in 
 two distinct sets. 
 
 The ist set = 5 harness, working 
 on the 5-leaf satin warp for face, 
 alternating with the 
 
 2d set = 5 harness, working on 
 the 5-leaf satin filling for face. 
 
 If only 8 front harness should be used for the design, we should have the 
 ist set .= 4 harness, working on the 4 harness broken twill warp for face. 
 
 2d set = 4 harness, working on the 4 harness broken twill filling for face. 
 
 Set 1 to alternate with set 2 to form the check. Care must be taken that the 
 number of checks formed by the front harness are evenly arranged to the figured 
 part of the fabric. For example, Fig. XXXIII., in the front harness part of the 
 design shows 5 warp checks and 5 filling checks in one row, = 10 checks. 
 
 Trout • 
 
 Htttttf 
 
 Fig. XXXII. 
 
•62 
 
 pW* ^tftR#%#* 
 
 Suppose 10 front harness are used and 20 warp-threads allowed for each check; 
 then 20 x 10 = 200 warp-threads, all used for effects by the front harness. 
 
 This requires 200 warp- 
 threads for figure effects 
 to be used by the Jacquard 
 harness. 
 
 The repeat of the pat- 
 tern is therefore 400 warp- 
 threads, which is produced 
 by straight-through tie-up, 
 front harness attached, 
 with 200 hooks and nee- 
 dles for figure part of the 
 design, plus 10 hooks and 
 needles for checkerboard 
 part of the fabric taken 
 from the 16 hooks and 
 needles of 2 reserve rows, 
 leaves 6 hooks and needles 
 for selvedge, etc. 
 
 As previously stated, 
 the front harness may be 
 used for dressgoods fab- 
 rics. In this way the de- 
 sign may be enlarged to any required extent. 
 
 Fig. XXXII. illustrates this method, using an 8-row Jacquard machine, with 
 4 front harness adjusted, in common use for the manufacture of dressgoods fabrics, 
 damasks, etc. 
 
 Fig. XXXIV. shows a fabric 
 designed for dressgoods forming 
 an all-over-set pattern. In this 
 design parts F and F" must 
 be executed with the Jacquard 
 leashes; parts G and G can be 
 executed with front harness. For 
 example: parts F and F' require 
 each 100 hooks, the ground part 
 to be woven in 4 harness broken 
 twill. We find the answer as tc 
 number of warp-threads in the 
 repeat and number of hooks re- 
 quired for weaving as follows : 
 
 KlG. XXXIV. 
 
 Fig. XXXIII. 
 
33 
 
 F 
 G 
 F" 
 G 
 
 F 
 F' 
 
 ioo threads. 
 
 ioo " (because covering the same distance as Fin part of the fabric.) 
 
 — ioo 
 
 — IOO 
 
 400 warp threads in repeat. 
 
 100 hooks. 
 100 
 
 200 hooks for figure. 
 
 4 hooks for weaving the ground, front harness. 
 
 204 hooks required to weave design, Fig. XXXIV., repeating with 400 
 warp-threads. 
 
 IV. The Centre Tie-up. 
 
 The centre tie-up, also called the point tie-up, has for its purpose the 
 enlargement of the design in fabrics such as table-covers, dressgoods, etc. This 
 
 tie-up resembles in its principle that of a common 
 point-draw on the harness-loom. After drawing 
 
 ihhia! 
 
 C A 
 
 from front to rear once straight through the 
 entire set of harness, draw from rear to front 
 fig. xxkv. and repeat. The only difference between 
 
 harness-work and Jacquard work is in the fact, that with harness we commence to 
 draw in from the first harness straight through to the last, A to B, and back again, 
 B to C; but with the Jacquard tie-up on this method this is arranged through the 
 threading of the comber-board, having a straight-through leasing of the heddles and 
 
 drawing in of the warp. 
 
 In Fig. XXXV. there is a clear illustration given of the principle of the centre 
 tie-up on an 8-row comber-board A, A, <B, <B'. In laying out the comber hoard, it 
 must be divided by the line C, C, into two equal parts, D, C, and C, D . In .he part 
 A, J', C, C, of the comber-board, we commence threading with leash 1 at the left- 
 hand rear corner, running in succession towards the centre, as indicated by the 
 arrow on this part of the comber-board. 
 
 In part B, B\ C, C, the threading begins in the opposite corner, to the right- 
 hand in front, with number 1 leash, threading in rotation the number of leashes from 
 the front towards the rear, as again indicated on the figure by an arrow. After 
 leasing and threading the harness, No. 1 leash will contain in its two mails the first 
 and the last of the warp-threads, as indicated in Fig. XXXV. by the numbers, and 
 the rotation by the arrows, S and S'. 
 
Fig. XXXVI. represents 
 this centre or point tie-up ap- 
 plied to a 200 Jacquard ma- 
 chine; comber-board, 8 rows 
 deep; two full divisions; A, B, 
 the first division ; B, D, the 
 second division ; C and C form- 
 ing the centre in each division. 
 This machine will, if tied-up in 
 this manner, produce a design 
 requiring 400 warp-threads. 
 We must arrange the design 
 for this tie-up so as to repeat 
 forwards and backwards re- 
 spectively in the centre. Such 
 a design will run upwards at a 
 given angle to a definite point, 
 then it will return by the same 
 angle in an opposite direction 
 until it reaches the base from 
 which it originally started. 
 
 In this manner design, 
 Fig. XXXVII., is constructed. 
 A, B, C, C', D, correspond with 
 the same letters used in Fig. 
 XXXVI. ; hence, it will readily 
 
 Fig. XX XVI. 
 
 M) 
 
 explain itself, as well as the 
 method to be observed in de- 
 signing for this kind of tie-up. 
 The design runs straight 
 through from A to C, and re- 
 peats itself backwards from C 
 to B, finishing at B the first 
 full division. 
 
 B-C equal A-C, 
 
 C'-D " C- 
 
 i-c,\ 
 
 -B,i 
 forming the second division. 
 
 Any changes as to different 
 sizes of machines, rows deep 
 of comber-board, or number of 
 divisions, must be executed 
 upon the principle explained 
 in this article. 
 
 Fig XXXVII. 
 
35 
 
 V. " Straight-Through " and " Point " Tie-ups Combined. 
 
 A. For fabrics requiring for their centres a straight-through tie-up and for their 
 
 borders a point tie-up, one-half division of it for each border. 
 
 Fig. XXXVIII. 
 
 These tie-ups are used to a great extent for napkins, handkerchiefs, scarfs, and 
 similar damask fabrics, in which the centre part of the fabric is worked on the straight- 
 through method ; the borders on each side on the point tie-up, repeating equally from 
 
36 
 
 centre towards the selvedge. In the other two borders to be woven at the beginning 
 and the end of the fabric, the same principle is observed, thus producing four corner 
 squares, only two of which need be designed, as the other two repeat through the 
 arrangement of the tie-up, which must repeat equally towards both sides of the 
 border at the connecting places. 
 
 Fig. XXXVIII. illustrates this method of tying-up a 200 machine, using 192 
 hooks and needles, equal to 24 long rows of a regular 8-row deep machine. The 
 machine is divided into two sections, as follows : 
 
 Needles 1 to 96 for the 1st section or centre. 
 
 97 " 192 " 2d " " the border. 
 
 4 repeats of centre, =4x96 = 384 ends. 
 
 2 repeats of border, one for each side,= 2 xg6= 192 " 
 
 576 ends in fabric, not including 
 selvedge. 
 The drawing represents four divisions for the centre, hence four harness-cords 
 for each leash. The border, having only two repeats in the fabric, will contain 
 
 only two harness-cords to one leash. In 
 the drawing the first full row of the ma- 
 chine is indicated, which is equal to the first 
 row deep of every centre division ; containing 
 harness-cords 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 
 We also show (heavy line) the last centre 
 leash, No. 96 being the last hook of row 1 2 
 of the machine. The borders A' and A" are 
 from the same design, but the figure runs in 
 an opposite direction in each one, as indicated 
 by the arrows in the comber-board above. 
 Border^' commences with harness-cord from 
 leash 192, ending with harness-cord from 
 leash 97, near the centre design. Border^" 
 d commences with harness-cord from leash 97, 
 near the centre design, ending with harness- 
 cord from leash 192 near the selvedge. The great difficulty to be overcome in 
 arranging these patterns for the loom is in the union of the two tie-ups, the straight- 
 through and the point. 
 
 As previously stated, the borders A' and A" are made with the point tie-up, while 
 the remainder of the borders are made with the straight-through tie-up. The com- 
 bination of these two tie-ups occurs in the corner squares of the border, and the 
 arrangement must be such as will permit the two sides of the corner patterns to 
 properly unite with the design for the balance of the border. 
 
 Ground plan for above fabric : Letters A, C, D, B, F, correspond to same letters 
 as used on the outside of fabric design. S, S', S", S"\ S"", also correspond for 
 centre division. 
 
 Corner 
 
 
 
 
 
 Corner 
 
 e. 
 
 
 
 
 
 C". 
 
 
 
 j 000 
 
 2 000 
 
 - 000 
 
 6- 
 
 . 000 
 
 4- 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 00 
 
 2 °o 
 
 ~ 00 
 
 0- 
 
 4. 00 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 I. 
 
 S". 
 2.° 
 
 6'". 
 
 -> 
 
 4-° 
 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 •7 
 
 4- 
 
 
 Comer 
 
 
 
 
 
 Coi 
 
 ncr 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 Hit 
 
37 
 
 For the purpose of giving a correct comprehension of the foregoing explanation 
 of tying-up, but under a different arrangement, Fig. XXXIX. was designed for a 
 600 machine, having the same arrangement of the borders, viz. : point tie-up, using 
 
 »• A. »' 
 
 f f «* 
 
 Fig. XXXIX. 
 
 one-half division for each side ; the centre a straight tie-up, but employing only 
 one repeat. The following particulars will explain the entire procedure : 
 
 200 needles and hooks are used for borders, point tie-up, once through, equals 
 1/ division for each border. [See letters B and B' on comber-board.] 
 
 d b 
 
 400 needles and hooks are used for centre, straight tie-up, one repeat. [See 
 letter C on comber-board.] 
 
S: 
 
 * ■*" 
 
 
 | MOO /r>t.i'Lij.i,> CWtrf. 
 *0* « « 3.T*tr. 
 
 CiKtre, pourt .J -SVCrtc 6 JiVijion-fi - pWwcftt ttreu-afc 5k. up.r. Noo y 4 « XNOet V ,f ". , '• S'Wujt *U 
 
 e<.f.iAt >;»<!<( ■» - «I6, 
 
 3 *. 1 b. l*xT(.t?.t?<xA}i. 
 
 BoTiitr 
 
 Centre A. 
 
 Centre 
 
 A* Centre Ah I " CW.reAV Centre A* J Ctwtfti? [ 
 
 IsrtUf 1 
 
39 
 
 200 ends for each border, = 400 warp-threads. 
 
 " centre, = 4. 00 
 
 800 warp-threads. 
 
 In the ground plan of the fabric A is the centre ; B, B\ B", B'", borders ; 
 
 E C, C", C"\ corners. 
 
 Fig. XL. is a fabric design executed on this principle : a to 6, border ; c to a, 
 
 centre ; b to a, repeat of the first border. 
 
 Straight-Through and Point Tie ups Combined. 
 
 B.—For fabrics requiring for their centres a straight-through tie-up, and for 
 their border on point tie-up one fill division for each border. 
 
 This arrangement of both foundation tie-ups resembles the preceding. The 
 only difference is found in employing the full division of the centre or point tie-up 
 for each border instead of the half division. 
 
 x'/i. ©is:® i»a !»<sr 
 1! oX®2te& 
 
 Oft®L««®«® 
 
 1 XOa%§P^- 
 
 io.©*®*®,* 
 
 ©«^"W£® 
 U© i&^W^ 
 
 ^ jflaTC^iyv. 
 (S?*^Wt»w rf Murder. 
 
 ' 4 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 wi > 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 2 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 ©■«>*■ \ 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *• 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 © 
 
 1® 
 
 qVH. 
 
 
 vo 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 O 
 
 qw- 
 
 
 t 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 i© 
 
 
 
 s© 
 
 3 
 
 • 
 
 3 
 
 © 
 
 © w 5 ^ 
 
 2 
 
 G 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 >© 
 
 
 '• 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 © 
 
 o«..t. 1 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 q 
 
 O 
 
 f© 
 
 
 1® 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 © 
 
 *n / 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 s© 
 
 
 »'© 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 © 
 
 a 1 "*- ) 
 
 b® 
 
 
 © 
 
 <•© 
 
 
 
 s s © 
 
 ie 
 
 1© 
 
 W9 
 
 
 '• 
 
 
 I© 
 
 1© 
 
 
 
 l<f © 
 
 »© 
 
 s© 
 
 ( 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 8© 
 
 QVIO I 
 
 
 ' L © 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 o""' \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 *• 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 1 "* \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 Fig. XLIII. 
 
 Fig. XLII. 
 
 Fig. XLI. illustrates this method of tying-up adjusted to a 600 Jacquard 
 machine. The centre of the fabric requires 400 needles and hooks in 6 repeats or 
 divisions, or 400 X 6= 2400 warp-threads. The border calls for 204 needles and 
 hooks, point tie-up, one full division for each side, or 204 X 2 X 2 — 816 warp-threads. 
 The arrangement of margin and selvedge, as applied on each side, is explained 
 
40 
 
 separately through ground plan of comber-board by fig. XLII. The margin calls for 
 8 needles and 8 hooks in machine, 6 repeats of same for each side, or 96 warp- 
 threads. The selvedge is formed by 2, 4 or 8 needles, (working plain), and has 
 24 heddles for each side or 48 selvedge-threads in warp. These selvedge ends may, 
 if preferred, be drawn two ends in one heddle. By adding these different systems 
 of threads we find : 
 
 Centre = 2400 warp-threads. 
 
 Borders = 816 " " (814 if point drawn only once.) 
 
 Margin = 96 " " 
 
 Selvedge =- 48 " " 
 
 3360 threads in warp. 
 
 For the centre part of the fabric, needle and hook 1 to 400 are used. 
 border " " " - 40I .. 6o4 .< 
 
 margin " " » >• 605 " 612 
 
 Leaving one complete row of the reserve to use for selvedge, etc., if required. 
 
 In drawing. Fig. XLL, we only illustrate centre and border of the tie-up, so as not 
 to confuse the eye by too many lines, and, as mentioned at the beginning, employed 
 Fig. XLII. for illustrating the ground plan for selvedge and margin. In selvedge 
 and margin the harness-cords are indicated by consecutive numbers, thus : 
 Margin, 1 to 48. 
 Selvedge, 1 " 24. 
 When threading margin in comber-board : 
 
 J . 9- J 7> 2 5. 33, 4i. call for the same leash. 
 
 2, 10, 18, 26, 34, 42, 
 
 3, 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 
 
 4, 12, 20, 28, 36, 44, 
 
 5, 13, 2i, 29, 37, 45, 
 
 6, 14, 22, 30, 38, 46, 
 
 7, 15. 23, 31, 39, 47, 
 
 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 
 
 Leashes in centre part of fabric, 1 to 400 call for 6 harness-cords, 
 
 border " 401 " 604 " 4 
 
 margin " 605 "612 " 12 
 
 " for selvedge if using 4 hooks, 613 "616 "12 " " 
 
 This tie-up is the one most frequently employed in the manufacture of damask 
 table-covers. Not only will drawings and explanations lead to a thorough 
 understanding of the procedure, but they will also readily show the great variety of 
 textile fabrics to which the principle of this tie-up may be applied. 
 
 Fig. XLIII. illustrates the margin arranged 8 threads for each row, and 5 
 rows or 40 threads for each side. The selvedge in this drawing is illustrated 
 by one complete row of 12 double threads for each side. The selvedge and 
 margin holes are all represented shaded. The selvedge is marked S in addition 
 to the number. The five margin rows are indicated each by figures 1 to 8. The 
 
41 
 
 nearest row of border is also represented, being numbered 401 to 412, 
 corresponding to Fig. XLI. This method of using only 8 rows of the 12-row deep 
 comber-board is extensively used in fabrics of a common texture, employing an 
 8 harness satin for the margin as weave, which repeats once for each row in 
 comber-board. Besides, a great advantage results from being able to tie-up 8 leashes 
 threaded 8 rows deep in comber-board to the 8 hooks in 1 row of the machine, 
 which the weave calls for. 
 
 Fig. XLIV. 
 
 Fig. XLIV. and Fig. XLV. represent designs for fabrics executed on this 
 method of tying-up. 
 
 Fig. XLIV. — A to B = border, (Tthe centre. 
 
 B " D= margin, between centre and border. 
 
 D " E = 1 repeat of the centre, 6 times over in width of fabric. 
 Fig. XLV. — A to B= border, Cits centre. 
 
 B " D— centre, 6 times over in width of fabric. 
 
 C P. D 
 
 Fig. XLV. 
 
42 
 
 Straight-Through and Point Tie-ups Combined. 
 
 C. — For fabrics having the centre for straight-through, with the border for 
 straight-through and point tie-ups, (half divisions), combined. 
 
 This method of tying-up is illustrated in Fig. XLVI., and the fabric produced in 
 Fig. XLVII. With this method of tying-up is usually introduced an extra margin for 
 the purpose of separating the ornamentation of the design, so as to permit of a clearer 
 definition. This is tied-up on 8 needles and hooks, situated between border and 
 centre, (24 ends) shown at margin (B in the design. The centre of the fabric, (two 
 
 Fig. XLVIII. 
 divisions only illustrated out of ten actually used), is tied-up on the straight- 
 through method, requiring for its working, harness-cords 1 to 240. The border has 
 the point tie-up in half sections ; these half sections have a straight-through tie-up 
 design in its centre. Harness-cords 241 to 456 are used for the straight-through 
 section, and 457 to 600 for the point tie-up section. The margin is produced by 
 harness-cords 601 to 608, leaving 16 needles and hooks of the machine unemployed, 
 which may be used for selvedge or other purposes. The drawing of this tie-up and 
 fabric illustrates only the right-hand side. The complete design requires, in 
 addition to the borders and margins, 10 divisions or repeats in the centre. The 
 figure shows only two of these repeats and border and margins of one side, 
 number of ends in the fabric is found as follows : 
 
 Centre, 10x240 =2400 ends. 
 
 Border, ] P° in .\. * X 144 = 5?6 j. =Ioog 
 
 The 
 
 ( straight, 2x216 = 432 
 between border and centre, 24x2 
 between border and selvedge, 48 x 2 
 
 Margin, 
 
 Selvedge, not indicated in drawing of tie-up, 
 
 = 48 }_ 
 = 96}- 
 
 144 
 
 — _^8 " 
 
 3620 ends in warp. 
 
43 
 
 Number of harness-cords required for each leash : 
 Leashes i to 240= 10 cords to 1 leash. 
 
 241 " 456= 2 " 1 " 
 
 457 " 600= 4 " 1 " 
 
 601 " 608 = 18 " 1 " 
 Selvedge leashes, if worked by 4 needles and hooks, = 12 cords to 1 leash. 
 Fig. XLVIII., on page 42, illustrates another fabric design to be executed on 
 
 this method of tie-up. 
 
 _ „ . f A to <B = point tie-up with C to (D. 
 A to <D = Border <> ~ r . , , . 
 
 I (2 to C = straight-through part. 
 
 <D to E = Centre, first repeat, division, for straight-through. 
 
 Straight-Through and Point Tie-ups Combined. 
 
 D. — For fabrics composed of the straight-through tie-up for centre ; the point 
 tie-up, half divisions, and the point tie-tip, full divisions, for borders. 
 
 Fig. XLIX. 
 
 This method of tie-up is used to a great extent in the manufacture of damask 
 napkins, containing in its centre the monogram of hotels, restaurants, or private 
 names. This effect is produced by floating the filling. 
 
 In this manner, we find tie-up, Fig. XLIX., and fabric sample, Fig. L., executed, 
 using for explanation a 400 Jacquard machine, certainly very low texture for these 
 fabrics. In case of a higher texture being necessary, each effect must be propor- 
 tionally increased. The machines most generally used for this class of fabrics are of 
 the 900-1200 denomination. 
 
 Taking the present tie-up into consideration, we find the centre for forming the 
 monogram, containing 200 harness-cords tied-up straight-through the borders on 
 
44 
 
 each side of the monogram, is executed on the point tie-up, one-half section for 
 each side, taking ioo needles and hooks, or harness-cords. The outside border on 
 each side is executed on the point tie-up, using one complete division of it for each 
 side ; and in addition, i oo harness-cords for the working. Adding these various 
 divisions of the harness-cords gives the number of warp-threads as follows, viz. : 
 
 Border, N, ioo needles on point = 200 threads, (199 if omitting the point 
 the second time). 
 
 " M, 100 needles on straight: 
 Centre, L, 200 " 
 Border, M', 100 " " return =100 " 
 
 " N', 100 " " point =200 " (199 if omitting the 
 
 double point.) 
 
 100 
 
 straight = 200 
 
 800 threads. 
 
 Fig. l. 
 
 For number of harness cords to each leash we find : 
 
 1 to 100 = 4 cords to each leash. 
 101 " 200= 2 " " " 
 
 201 " 400 r= 1 cord " " 
 
 Needles and hooks, 
 
 Fig. LI. illustrates a fabric, damask table-cover, to be executed on the same 
 principle. 
 
Fig. LI. 
 
46 
 
 Margin = a to b and h to i. 
 
 - { „ \ b to c and return c to d\ ^ . 
 Border J sma11 = {/ « g « " g •• A } Point 
 ( main = d" e " " e " f 
 Centre = ist division i to £, straight-through. 
 
 This fabric can also be executed on the tie-up explained through Fig. XLI., as 
 follows : 
 
 Borders: a to i on point tie-up, e for centre or point. 
 Centre = ist division i to k, straight-through. 
 
 Straight-Through and Point Tie-ups Combined. 
 E. — Mixed Tie-up. 
 
 Containing in one repeat of the design the straight-through tie-up and 
 the point tie-up, one full division, for the centre ; the point tie-up, in half 
 divisions, repeating once through on each side of the fabric, to make the border. 
 These arrangements of tie-ups are used to a great extent in the manufacture of 
 damask fabrics of every denomination. 
 
 The principle of using mixed tie-ups, Fig. LIL, is found in the necessity of 
 producing large designs, containing varied effects, with a proportionally smaller 
 Jacquard machine. Under whatever management the straight-through and the 
 point tie-ups are combined, their principle remains undisturbed. Every time we 
 arrange a Jacquard loom on a mixed tie-up, we must consider that any subsequent 
 design must be arranged with reference to the same principle as the one in use, 
 otherwise the work must all be rearranged, which would have to be done even for 
 the smallest change in the number of ends for each effect. 
 
 Take for illustration a damask fabric, Fig. LIIL, handkerchief, bureau scarf, 
 art square, etc. The details given will make the work quite plain : 
 
 Part of comber-board from A to (B, or (D to C, illustrates one-half of the board 
 and procedure of tying-up. The design below also shows only one-half of the 
 fabric. Arrow, G, near comber-board, and arrow, M, near fabric, are placed to 
 indicate the direction in which a repeat is obtained. The fabric will form its centre 
 at D, repeating towards each border and selvedge. This is illustrated in the 
 comber-board by the i-row deep, outside of line A, D. Harness-cords indicated 
 by dotted lines. The threading of this last mentioned row, as well as the threading 
 of the half division of the point tie-up, is indicated by arrows //and K, forming the 
 centre by means of harness-cords 193 and 193. The straight-through tie-up part of 
 the fabric is found between E and F, containing 12 repeats in the centre, and also 
 the same number in the lower border. In the comber-board is illustrated this 
 arrangement, repeating the first row, containing harness-cords i,.2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 
 twelve times, and the last hole of the third row containing harness-cord No. 24, 
 twelve times. On the bottom of the comber-board these 12 repeats are indicated 
 by 1 2 small arrows between parts E to F. 
 
 The first row in the first division of the straight-through tie-up is completely 
 
47 
 
 Fig. LIII. 
 
 threaded; the other eleven have only the harness-cord from leash i, as indicated ; this 
 is done so as not to confuse the eye with too many lines. The border of the fabric 
 is arranged for harness-cords 25 to 192 on the point tie-up, having one-half division 
 
•18 
 
 on each side. Arrow L indicates die right-hand border. The border on the left 
 requires the same harness-cords which are threaded in comber-board from right to 
 left ; hence the borders of the fabric contain the same design repeating from the 
 centre towards the selvedge. 
 
 At the beginning we stated that the use of mixed tie-ups made it possible to 
 employ a smaller size Jacquard machine for large designs containing various 
 effects. The following analysis of Fig. L1I. shows very clearly how this is done. 
 Number of warp-ends in one complete repeat in width of the fabric : 
 
 Border, right-hand, = 168 threads. 
 
 Centre, straight-tie, = 288 
 
 " P0int " tie ' { = lot 
 
 straight-tie, = 288 
 
 Border, left hand, = 168 
 
 1248 ends warp in fabric. 
 
 Number of needles required to produce the design : 
 
 Border, = 168 needles. 
 
 Centre on straight-tie, = 24 needles. 
 
 Centre on point-tie, = 168 needles. 
 
 360 needles required for producing the complete design, thus saving the 
 difference between 1248 and 360, or 888 needles; all of which is 
 accomplished through the use of the mixed tie-up. 
 
 Number of harness-cords required for each leash : 
 
 Leashes 1 to 24 contain 24 cords for one repeat of the entire design. Leashes 
 25 to 360 contain 2 cords for one repeat of the entire design. It is not always 
 practicable to reduce the effects in a design to the lowest possible number of 
 needles. On account of the changes in styles, it is best to arrange these tie-ups with 
 a view to giving as much opportunity as possible to the designer. In the present 
 tie-up experience teaches that it will be more advantageous to arrange the straight- 
 through tie-up either for 6 divisions to 48 ends each, or 4 divisions to 72 ends each. 
 360 needles, as figured at the beginning, require a 400 machine, or, counting reserve 
 rows, 416 needles; hence we can, without disadvantage, increase 360 needles to 384 
 or 408. which will give a greater scope, if required, to make a new design. 
 
 VI. The Straight-Through Tie-up in Two Sections. 
 
 A. — Using machine and comber-board in two equal sections. 
 
 This tie-up, Fig. LIV., is used on fabrics having two different kinds of warp, 
 which, as a rule, are of different colors. One of these warps is shown working 
 at B in the comber-board, and also at the bottom-board. The other warp employed 
 for the figure effect is shown working at A. Fabrics that are made on this 
 tie-up can also be made on the common straight-through ; but the work of designing 
 and card stamping will be largely increased. In the illustration all the figure- 
 

 threads, and also all the threads 
 used for the weave (binder- 
 threads) can be designed without 
 interruption to each other. The 
 breaking- off of the figures is thus 
 avoided, a thing quite impossible 
 where the regular straight- through 
 tie-up is used. The drawing given 
 herewith represents this straight- 
 through tie-up in sections applied 
 to a 200 Jacquard machine. The 
 reserve rows are omitted. The 
 machine and the comber-board, it 
 will be observed, are divided into 
 two even parts. In one part, the 
 rear of A, of the comber-board 
 we thread only in the leashes 
 from needles 1 to 100, and in the 
 other part, front of (2, from nee- 
 dles 101 to 200. Hence, the first 
 row of the comber-board contains 
 leashes 1 to 4 and 101 to 104; the 
 second row will contain leashes 5 to 
 8 and 105 to 108; the third row will 
 contain leashes 9 to 1 2 and 109 to 
 112, and so on, each division finish- 
 
 Fig. LIV. 
 
 ing on the last row (25th) with 
 leashes 97 to 100 and 197 to 200. 
 The leasing of the threads is 
 always done by alternately thread- 
 ing the harness-cords of section 
 A with section <B. Hence, first 
 thread of the warp draws in first 
 mail of leash No. 1 ; second thread 
 of the warp draws in first mail of 
 leash No. 101 ; third thread of the 
 warp draws in first mail of leash 
 No. 2 ; fourth thread of the warp 
 draws infirstmailof leash No. 102. 
 Fig. LV., a fabric design for 
 cloaking for straight-through tie- 
 up in two sections. A, face warp, 
 black silk; (B, back warp, black 
 cotton. 
 
 Fig. LV. 
 
50 
 
 (B. Using two machines and a comber-board having equal sections. 
 
 Sometimes two or more machines are employed in producing fabrics having 
 two systems of warps ; each machine working on its own system. In this manner 
 Fig. LYI. is executed, representing a straight-through tie-up arranged for two 
 Jacquard machines, 6" and H, in which the warp is drawn in the Jacquard harness as 
 follows : one end from machine S, one end from machine H. For explanation two 
 ioo Jacquard machines are used for the purpose of simplifying the arrangements of 
 laying out and threading the comber-board. A larger Jacquard machine for the 
 illustrations would require more leashes, and the explanation would be more difficult. 
 The comber-board, a, b, c, d, is divided into two equal parts, S and H. Each 
 part containing the harness-cord for one machine only. The drawing of the tie-up is 
 
 arranged for two divisions, and also readily 
 explains any tie-up for more divisions. 
 
 The leasing of the Jacquard harness, 
 K, is arranged (as illustrated in the draw- 
 ing by leash-rods p and r) to commence as 
 follows : 
 
 ist end: harness-cord fastened to No. 
 i needle of machine, S; 2d end to No. i° 
 needle of machine, H ; 3d end to No. 2 
 needle of machine, S; 4th end to No. 2° 
 needle of machine, H; 5th end to No. 3 
 needle of machine, S; 6th end to No. 3 
 needle of machine, H; 7th end to No. 4 
 needle of machine, S; 8th end to No. 4 
 needle of machine, H. 
 
 These eight ends, forming the first 
 complete row of the comber-board, will 
 use the first row of both machines ; the 
 second row of the comber-board will use 
 the second row of both machines ; and so 
 on, until every row of the comber-board, 
 with corresponding row of the Jacquard 
 fig. lvi. machine, is taken up. In the drawing we 
 
 have indicated, as usual, besides the first row, the last row of the machine and the 
 comber-board ; or, in other words, we show the threading of 
 
 Warp end 193 : harness-cord fastened to No. 97 needle of harness 5". 
 
 *7J [u > StTgiafA-tfamulfr ^Uup.^^JtttyctTcU 
 
 194: 
 
 195: 
 196: 
 197: 
 198: 
 199: 
 200 : 
 
 97° 
 98 
 9S 
 99 
 99° 
 100 
 
 IOO 
 
 H. 
 
 S. 
 
 H. 
 
 S. 
 
 H. 
 
 S. 
 
 H. 
 
51 
 
 This method of using two Jacquard machines, on the principle explained, is 
 employed on Jacquard looms for dressgoods figured with an extra warp, on uphol- 
 stery goods, and similar textile fabrics. 
 
 Fig. LVII. shows a fabric design for a curtain, to be executed on the straight- 
 through tie-up in two sections. 
 
 C. — Using one machine and one comber-board: the machine unequally divided and 
 the comber-board equally divided. 
 
 To explain, take the regular 
 upholstery fabric tie-up known as 
 "petty point," on a 600 machine 
 12 rows in depth. 600 -j- 12 = 50 
 + 2 rows reserve =52 rows in 
 width. We find used — 
 
 1 row for selvedge. 
 10 rows for binders ((B). 
 41 rows for figure (A). 
 
 52 rows. 
 41 (rows figure) x 12 (needles 
 for one row) = 492 needles to be 
 used for figure. 
 
 10 (rows binder) x 12 (needles 
 for one row) = 1 20 needles to be 
 used for binder. 
 
 Suppose we have four divi- 
 sions in loom, hence, four harness- 
 cords to one leash, for the figure 
 section, or 492 X 4= 1968 ends of 
 warp used for figure. 1968 threads 
 of figure warp require the same 
 number of threads of ground warp, 
 which must be divided by 120, the 
 number of needles and hooks set 
 apart for it in the machine, or — as 
 each needle and hook carries one 
 leash — 120 leashes. 1968-^-120 = 
 
 -k-.ii-i-.-.-ii r 
 
 Fig. LVII. 
 
 16 repeats ; and 48 leashes, or four rows in the 
 machine, must each have 17 harness-cords carrying 816 threads ; and 72 leashes, or 
 six rows in the machine, must each have 16 harness-cords carrying 1152 threads, 
 — 1968. 
 
 VII. Tying-up a Jacquard Harness for Figuring Part of the Design with an 
 Extra Warp, (part for Two Sections, part for Single). 
 
 This tie-up (the character of which is indicated in Fg. LVIII.) is used for textile 
 fabrics having two distinct warps in part of the fabric, and a single warp in the 
 
52 
 
 remainder, for ground only. It will readily be seen in the drawing which explains this 
 tie-up that one part of the fabric will have to contain more ends of warp per inch than 
 the other, as the figuring is done with an extra warp upon the regular ground cloth. 
 The number of ends of ground warp per inch will, as a general rule, be the same 
 
 Fig. LVIII. 
 
 throughout the fabric. In Fig. LVIII., explaining this method of tying-up, the tex- 
 ture is twice as high in the figure stripe as in the ground part of the fabric. If 40 
 ends of warp per inch are used for the ground, 80 ends per inch must be used in the 
 figured part, (2 to C, <B' to C). 
 
53 
 
 A 200 machine is used in the illustration, divided as follows : 
 150 needles for the ground over the entire fabric, A to f B". 
 50 needles for the figure effects, (B to C, and <B' to C. 
 
 The comber-board, therefore, must be arranged accordingly, (2^ divisions in 
 drawing executed). The depth of the comber-board is divided into two parts: 
 H, M, A 7 ", K, the first ; M, A 7 ", O, P, the second. The first contains leashes fastened 
 to neck-cords attached to needles 151 to 200, or the figure part, F and F' ; the 
 second contains leashes fastened to neck-cords attached to the needles 1 to 150, or 
 the ground part for the entire fabric. In the drawing of lines showing the harness- 
 cords of the Jacquard harness we have only indicated : 
 
 A. The ground part, leashes Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4 in rotation, and No. 150. This 
 last leash of the ground warp we have indicated by a heavy line. 
 
 B. For the figure part, needles 151 to 200 are used. Leashes 151, 152, 153, 
 154, are indicated in rotation, also the leash operated by hook 200; this latter one 
 being also lined more distinctly than the others. 
 
 These explanations readily show how to adapt the tying-up for any textile fabric 
 made upon this principle to any number Jacquard machine. 
 
 VIII. The Straight-Through Tie-up in Three Sections. 
 
 The straight-through tie-up in three sections, which is illustrated by drawings, 
 Figs. LIX. and LX., is largely used in the manufacture of fancy plushes and velvets, 
 and also in the construction of any other kinds of fabrics in which the face is figured 
 in three systems of warps, or in two systems of warps for the face and one system 
 for the binder. 
 
 If it were required, these fabrics could be made on the straight tie-up, (Figs. 
 XXV., XXVIII. and XXX.), but, as will readily be seen, they may be worked to 
 much better advantage, both for designing and card-stamping, upon the method 
 shown here. 
 
 Fig. LIX. illustrates the method of adjusting the leashes to the neck-cords and 
 threading the comber-board. In the example, we use for describing the method a 
 900 Jacquard machine, and follow the English system for placing it on the loom. 
 The machine is divided into three sections : Section 1, using hooks and needles 1 to 
 300; Section 2, using hooks and needles 301 to 600; Section 3, using hooks and 
 needles 601 to 900, leaving the two reserve rows (generally found in every machine) 
 out of the illustration. 
 
 The comber-board is divided into two divisions lengthways, (but the same method 
 must be observed if more than two divisions are used), and also into three sections 
 in its depth. The number of sections in the comber-board must correspond to the 
 -number of sections in the machine. 
 
 The threading of the machine is done from the rear towards the front, and from 
 the left towards the right. The threading of the comber-board is done in a corres- 
 ponding manner. 300 ends for each section in one division, divided by 4 rows deep 
 each section, making 75 cross-rows. Threading of the Jacquard harness is as follows : 
 
No. I from Section i, white. 
 301 " " 2, shaded 
 
 54 
 
 301 
 601 
 
 2 
 302 
 602 
 
 3 
 3°3 
 603 
 
 4 
 304 
 604 
 
 5 
 305 
 605 
 
 3, black. 
 
 1, white. 
 
 2, shaded. 
 
 3, black. 
 
 1, white. 
 
 2, shaded. 
 
 3, black. 
 
 1, white. 
 
 2, shaded. 
 
 3, black. 
 
 1, white. 
 
 2, shaded. 
 
 3, black. 
 
 And so on ; all of 
 which are shown 
 separately in Fig. 
 LX. 
 
 R and R" are for the two-lease strings ; S, the successive order of threads ; 
 S", the number of leashes. Hooks and needles correspond with drawino- A White 
 warp-threads indicate section 1 ; shaded warp-threads, section 2 ; Mack warp- 
 threads, section 3. The fine lines in Fig. LIX. indicate the leashes for the first 
 
55 
 
 row deep of the comber-board ; the heavy lines indicate the last leash for each 
 section. 
 
 Fig. LXI. illustrates a fabric designed for this tie-up. The various small star 
 effects are arranged on the principle of the 5-leaf satin. 
 
 
 * $ -#-$&* • ^$## ®-$-*$#®*# 
 
 Fig. LXI. 
 IX. The Point Tie-up in Three Sections. 
 
 This method of tying-up Jacquard looms shows the point tie-up applied to the 
 three-section arrangement, on the same principle as the straight-through in 
 paragraph VIII. 
 
 Fig. LXII. shows the comber-board divided into three distinct sections, marked 
 
 Fig. LXII 
 
 /., II. and III. For explanation, take a 300 machine ; allow 100 needles and hooks 
 for each section, distributed as follows: Section *I., 1 to 100 ; Section II., 101 to 200 ; 
 Section III., 201 to 300. Each section contains 200 warp-threads ; and the complete 
 
56 
 
 division of three sections, 600 threads. The threading of three sections, illustrated 
 in Fig. LX., is applied to the present tie-up, as follows : 
 
 1st end, from section I., attached to No. 1 harness-cord. 
 
 2d 
 
 (t ( 
 
 II., 
 
 ( ( i 
 
 101 
 
 tt 
 
 
 3d 
 
 tt i 
 
 III., 
 
 tt t 
 
 ' 201 
 
 tt 
 
 
 4th 
 
 if ( 
 
 I- 
 
 a t 
 
 ' 2 
 
 tt 
 
 
 5th 
 
 f < < 
 
 II., 
 
 1 
 
 102 
 
 it 
 
 
 6th 
 
 a t 
 
 III., 
 
 <« 1 
 
 ' 202 
 
 a 
 
 
 7 th 
 
 if t 
 
 I., 
 
 (< t 
 
 * 1 
 
 
 t t 
 
 
 8th 
 
 U i 
 
 II., 
 
 a t 
 
 103 
 
 tt 
 
 
 9 th 
 
 a t 
 
 III., 
 
 it i 
 
 203 
 
 f< 
 
 And so on. 
 
 X. Combination Tie-up in Two Sections. (" Tie-up Amalgamate.") 
 
 This tie-up illustrates the point tie-up and the straight-through combined on the 
 two-section system. In Fig. LXIII., a 600 machine is used for illustration ; the 
 
 Fig. LXIII. 
 
 comber-board being divided into two parts : a, b, c, d, for No. 1 section ; e, f, g, h, 
 for No. 2 section. 
 
 No. 1 section requires the use of needles and hooks 1 to 200 on the straight- 
 through principle, four divisions, taking 800 warp-threads. 
 
 No. 2 section requires the use of needles and hooks 201 to 600 on the point 
 principle, one division, taking 800 warp-threads. The two sections thus use 1600 
 warp-threads in one repeat. 
 
 The threading of the harness is as follows : 1-201, 2-202, 3-203, etc., ending 
 with 200-201. 
 
 This tie-up, as well as any changes in the arrangement and the number of needles, 
 (but not changed in its principle), is used for double color figures of warps of large 
 design, with a small all-over figure effect (No. 1 section) for the ground. Fig. 
 LXIV. is executed on this tie-up. 
 
 
Fig. LXIV. 
 
 XI. The Straight-Through Tie-up in Four Sections. 
 
 Fig. LXV. shows 384 needles and hooks of the Jacquard machine, threaded in 
 four sections in comber-board, A, <B, C, D. The threading of comber-board is as 
 follows: «,i ,.„.„- 
 
 Fig. LXXV. 
 
58 
 
 2d, " 
 
 2 
 
 3d, " 
 
 3 
 
 4th, " 
 
 4 
 
 5th, " 
 
 5 
 
 6th, " 
 
 6 
 
 7th, " 
 
 7 
 
 8th, " 
 
 8 
 
 9th, " 
 
 9 
 
 ist, No. i leash in section i. 
 
 2. 
 
 3 
 " .. ^ 
 
 i 
 
 II it - 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 it St . 
 
 And so on. The threading of the harness is explained below the comber-board, 
 /and m indicating the leash-strings; and warp-threads i, 2, 3, 4, from leashes 1, 2, 
 3, 4, are indicated as threaded. 
 
 384 times 4 divisions make 1536 warp-threads. 
 
 XII. Tying-up of Jacquard Looms with Compound Harness attached. 
 
 Tying-up of Jacquard looms with extra compound harness, consists in applying 
 two separate systems of harness in the loom. The warp-threads, after having 
 passed through the Jacquard harness, are passed through harness in front. Each 
 system of harness performs special duty, although they are both working the same 
 warp. The Jacquard harness is used for forming the general design on a large 
 scale ; the second harness divides this pattern into detail, (twills, satins, or any 
 other desired weave). The above tie-up is necessary in the manufacture of rich 
 damasks and similar fabrics, where a large number of warp-ends is required, with a 
 correspondingly small number of picks per inch. Suppose a damask fabric to contain 
 300 ends warp per inch, with only 75 picks per inch; or in the proportion of 4 to 1. 
 Now, to employ this principle of making four ends warp equal to one filling, the 
 size of the design would be produced in the fabric, but the richness, and also the 
 fineness, of the face of the fabric would be entirely lost. To prevent this it should 
 be the object of the designer to keep the fine warp-threads entirely on the surface, 
 to interweave the proportion of ends varying between warp and filling (as in 
 example above, four warp-threads) separately. This principle of textures requires 
 the compound harness to be attached ; or, in other words, a machine must be used 
 which is capable of raising not only every alternate thread, but every third, fourth, 
 or eighth thread, if required, for the formation of the body of the cloth. 
 
 Fig. LXYI. illustrates as plainly as possible the principle of tying-up to do this 
 work, using a 100 Jacquard machine for figuring, comber-board threaded in three 
 divisions, four heddles to each leash, eight compound harnesses. 
 
 In the tying-up of Jacquard harness four heddles to one leash are generally 
 used, as illustrated at c, in Fig. LXVI. ; each heddle containing one warp-thread. 
 Fig. LXVII. shows the arrangement of these four warp-threads, when using only 
 one heddle to each leash, but in which the mail contains four eyes. This method 
 is less frequently employed. Instead of using a 100 machine, as in Fig. LXVI., 
 
59 
 
 A. 200 machine (straight-through) will require 800 warp-threads for each division. 
 
 300 
 400 
 600 
 900 
 1200 
 
 1200 
 1600 
 2400 
 3600 
 4800 
 
 v t 1 » 
 
 r A & MMLi 
 
 ijjiHilii 
 
 100 Mfltcfiint s^ivtsiuTis s harness 
 
 *O0 tf.rta.Af Mf $WvSv«tV llOO tf.rtAAf «w *'•.*(■ 
 
 IIM 
 
 m 
 
 
 *i*i 
 
 =V 
 
 2 
 
 Fig. LXVI. 
 
 To change the tie-up principle from the straight-through method to the point 
 method, taking a 1200 machine using four heddles per harness-cord, 
 9600 warp-threads will be required for each division for repeat of 
 pattern. 
 
 This little example plainly shows the great advantage of this 
 method of tying-up looms for making the finest damasks, etc. 
 
 To explain the general method of this tie-up, commence with 
 Fig. LXVI., which represents a 100 machine, three divisions, four 
 heddles to one leash, eight compound harnesses. 
 
 It will not be necessary to explain the threading of the comber-board, as 
 
 Fig. LXVII. 
 
60 
 
 BP 
 
 SB 
 
 -*- 
 
 this is always done on the same plain principles. The four heddles of the first 
 row deep of comber-board emerge below the board at the beginning of the 
 first division, marked a, a', a", a'". The first row deep in comber-board in the first 
 division, and the last row deep in comber-board in the third division only are shown ; 
 but as these two rows also indicate the first and last rows in the Jacquard machine, 
 and as the principle of a, a', a", a'", and b, b\ b", b'", has to be observed in every one 
 of these 75 rows deep in width of comber-board E' to E" taken, it will explain the 
 tie-up for the entire number. At c, in leash a, four distinct heddles are adjusted ; 
 the same thing is repeated in every one of the eight 
 leashes extended in drawing below the comber-board, 
 giving in return, thus: four heddles and three divisions 
 in a 100 machine = 4 x 3 X 100, or 1200 warp-threads 
 for the entire fabric. 
 
 Now, following the first heddle downwards on 
 leash 1, a, c, marked on drawing, d, (indicated by 
 dotted lines), No. 1 harness of the compound harness, 
 H, is reached. The cross X on this harness indicates 
 that the warp-thread drawn through mail fastened on 
 heddle, d, must also be drawn through No. i harness ; 
 the next heddle from the same leash will reach No. 2 FlG - lxviii. 
 
 harness ; and so on until No. 4 harness is taken up, which will finish No. 1 harness- 
 cord of No. 1 leash in the first division. The second harness-cord, a', will use 
 harness 5, 6, 7, 8 ; the third harness-cord, a", will use harness 1, 2, 3, 4, over again, 
 as used by a ; the fourth harness-cord, a'", will use harness 5, 6, 7, 8, over again, as 
 used by a'. 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 
 
 Fig. LXIX. 
 
 Continue in this manner until leash 100 in the first division on harness 5, 6, 7, 8, 
 is finished. The second and third divisions strictly repeat the first. 
 
 Fig. LXIX. represents the side elevation for Fig. LXVI. In both of these 
 drawings some of the letters and figures correspond, as follows : harness-cords 
 
61 
 
 a, a', a", a'", in first row deep of comber-board, E, E'. //shows compound harness 
 set i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 ; figures i, 2, 3, 4, on top of comber-board represent the 
 first row deep from the front elevation in drawing. 
 
 New letters : B, the warp-beam ; Z, the lease of the warp formed by rods, Z' 
 and Z" '; O, the distance between the Jacquard harness and compound harness set,//. 
 D, the shed, as formed in loom when weaving. For illustration of this shed 
 pick No. 7 in Fig. LXVIIL, shows that leashes 2 and 3, or a' and a", are raised at 
 the same time. Leashes 1 and 4, or a and a'", are not raised. 
 
 The principle of forming the shed for picking the shuttle will be more 
 particularly explained later on by Figs. LXX. to LXXV. 
 
 At c, in Fig. LXIX., the beginning of the shed is shown ; also the last woven 
 part of the fabric, c, c', c", which is indicated as passing around the breast-beam, E. 
 L, L', L", L'", indicate leashes 1, 2, 3, 4, extending to the Jacquard machine 
 towards neck-cords 1, 2, 3, 4. 
 
 Fig. LXX. represents a warp-thread forming 
 the bottom part of a shed. Mail, /, and harness. 
 
 H, occupy a position similar to that of mail and f — 
 
 harness for warp-thread passing through No. 1 
 
 heddle of leash a, and harness 1 in Fig. LXIX. FlG - LXX - 
 
 Warp-thread No. 2, passing through leash a, and harness 2, in Fig. LXIX. is the same 
 
 I 
 
 4. 
 
 15. 
 16, 
 
 a, 
 
 a 1 ", 
 
 a'", 
 
 a'", 
 
 4- 
 5. 
 
 7. 
 
 Fig. LXXI. shows a warp-thread forming part 
 of the top shed by raising the leash ; hence mail,/, 
 is shown raised. The compound harness is sup- 
 posed to be resting, which allows the warp-thread 
 to slide up to the height of the required size of 
 shed. This figure illustrates plainly the following 
 warp-threads in Fig. LXIX. 
 Warp-thread No. 5, passing through leash a', and harness 5, in Fig. LXIX. is the same. 
 
 Fig. LXXI. 
 
 7, 
 
 8, 
 
 9. 
 10, 
 
 a", 
 a", 
 
 12, " " a", 
 
 Fisf. LXXII. illustrates the side view of a 
 warp-thread where the hook of the Jacquard is not 
 raised ; hence, the mail remains in its resting place. 
 Following the warp-thread towards c, the com- 
 pound harness is shown raised, thus forming part 
 
 7. 
 8, 
 
 I, 
 
 2, 
 
 4- 
 
 Fig. LXXII. 
 
62 
 
 of the top of a shed. This figure is designed to show the passage of the warp-thread 
 through mail No. 3 of leash a, and harness No. 3, in Fig. LXIX. 
 
 Fig. LXXIII. illustrates a thread forming part 
 of a lower shed. In the drawing the mail is raised, 
 but at the same time the heddle of harness is low- 
 ered, compelling the thread to rest on the bottom 
 of the lay. This figure is designed to show warp- 
 
 thread passing through mail No. 6, of leash 
 
 Fig. LXXIII. 
 
 and harness No. 6, in Fig. LXIX. 
 Fig. LXXIV. is a side view of a thread forming the upper part of a shed where 
 mail and harness have been raised the same as in Fig. LXIX., the warp-thread 
 passing through mail No. 1 1 of leash, a", and harness No. 3. 
 
 Fig. LXXV. illustrates mail not raised and harness down. This change is not 
 necessary in Fig. IV. ; the warp-thread forming the lower part of the shed. 
 
 v. 
 
 in 
 
 Fig. LXXIV. Fig.. LXXV. 
 
 In Figs. LXX. to LXXV. the following letters correspond with the same letters 
 Fig. LXIX. : Z", nearest lease-rod to Jacquard harness ; D, shed for picking 
 
 shuttle ; C, starting point of shed or last woven place of fabric. 
 
 The Kind of Heddles Required for Compound Harness. 
 
 ... 
 
 The eyes of these heddles are much longer than those of common heddles. 
 They must be sufficiently long to allow the six movements illustrated in Fig. LXX. to 
 LXXV., hence the height of these heddle eyes will influence the height of the shed 
 
 Working the Compotoid Harness by a Separate Machine. 
 
 
 For working compound harness a separate small witch-loom is generally used, 
 thus saving, to a great extent, the Jacquard cards. In this manner the ground 
 may be easily altered without changing any cards, it being only necessary to change 
 the small set of cards on the witch-loom controlling one repeat of the body weave for 
 the harness. The number of picks for the harness can also be readily adjusted to 
 one change in the Jacquard figure without disturbing the cards of any consequence. 
 For example : in manufacturing a damask fabric, suppose four harness picks make 
 one change of figure in the Jacquard machine, and it is necessary to reduce these 
 four picks to one change of figure, on account of having to use some heavier filling, 
 or other similar reason ; this alteration can be easily made when using two separate 
 machines. 
 
63 
 
 Number of Compound Harness to Use. 
 
 The number of harness used is regulated by the weave required for raising, and 
 the weave required for lowering. 
 
 The number of harness may vary to a large degree, as we may FlG - LXXVI - 
 use any suitable weave from the 4-leaf twill up to the 16-leaf satin. As 
 a general rule, for fine damasks we use the 8-leaf satin, requiring 8 
 harness. 
 
 Fig. LXXVII. 
 
 nnnnnan» 
 QBiaaaaa 
 
 □DD iJL«Bn 
 
 ______ 
 
 Positions of Compound Harness During Weaving. 
 
 There are three distinct positions for the harness : 
 1st, centre; 2d, up; 3d, down. 
 
 Fig. LXVIII., p. 60, illustrates the 8-leaf satin com- 
 Fiiimg vs eave as b; n { n pr filling- and warp up in one design. 
 
 lsed in the upper £> o r r t> 
 
 A few Different Weaves for Working Compound Harness, 
 
 naagnaaa 
 nnnnnnMn 
 B Mnn cn 
 
 □aaaMana 
 
 naaanaaa 
 m - 
 
 grat- 
 ia 
 □D«r~ 
 ■aaan 
 
 Fig. LXXVIII. 
 
 annxaaac 
 aaanoaxc 
 3*nUU || ir 
 
 Tz2\:~z.tzx. 
 aa*aaaaa 
 Bnnnnxnn 
 
 raised in the upper 
 shed hy harness. 
 
 ■ Risers. 
 
 d Sinkers. 
 
 Warp Weave to 
 interweave in lower 
 shed through har- 
 ness. 
 
 CI Warp on face. 
 
 X Warp down. 
 
 Fig. LXXIX. 
 
 Baa«aanM 
 DuwuunKi 
 
 cu~~~m' :=i 
 
 Maaaaaaa 
 
 inmnacm 
 
 QnannnMn 
 
 EBaaa«aa 
 ■nnamaaa 
 
 Oil ■■■ 
 
 ■"■■■"■■ 
 
 ■■■ IBB 
 
 ■ BB ■■■ 
 
 UDIHDI 
 
 ~~iciMMa 
 
 A. Filling up. B. Warp up. 
 
 A great variety of combinations 
 of different weaves for this class of 
 textile fabrics exist. It is only 
 necessary to illustrate a few more 
 examples to guide us in finding the 
 principles underlying these changes. 
 
 Fig. LXXX. 
 
 5-Leaf Satin. 
 
 nnnMaaaaaa 
 
 ::*: 3n«nBE 
 ■_ a . . ■ 
 ■ a 
 
 Maa a 
 
 gnaw iaBgiQ 
 
 □inn n nc 
 ■ ■ 
 
 DuMnninDTJn 
 
 Mnnnaw — n 
 
 Filling. 
 
 ■■ ■■■■ ■■ 
 
 BBBB BBEa 
 EBB IB1I ■ 
 
 B DBBB mn 
 ■ ■■■' OHOQ I 
 
 ed ami ■■ 
 
 BBBB BBII 
 BBB ■■■■ ■ 
 
 a ■■■■:;■■■ 
 
 Warp. 
 
 Fig. LXXXI. 
 7-Leaf Satin. 
 
 M l II II I! ITJ 
 
 :Baaa 
 a 
 
 Filling. 
 
 =■■■■■■ 
 
 ■EDII I 
 ■19 199 
 
 Warp. 
 
 Fig. LXXXII. 
 
 8-Leaf Satin. 
 
 aaaaa*aa 
 
 .Z~W±~Z7 
 
 . u 
 ■Han 
 
 a«a:a 
 
 n«n 
 
 ...:■ 
 ■nri; — 1 a 
 
 Filling. 
 
 8-Harness 
 Broken Twill. 
 
 I BB 
 
 BBBB BBB 
 ■■■ ■■■■ 
 BBBBBBB 
 
 B IIIIII 
 
 BB 11933 
 
 Warp. 
 
 Fig. LXXXIII. 
 
 8-Leaf Satin. 
 
 UULiLiUMUd 
 
 oninr 
 xnnnaaw 
 annc wanq 
 3Bnn 
 
 ■ : 
 
 b laaa 
 
 Maaaannn 
 
 Filling. 
 
 8-Harness 
 Fancy Twill. 
 
 BBB BBB 
 BBBB ■ a 
 BBBB BB 
 
 CI QSBBI 
 B BBS BB 
 
 Warp. 
 
 Fig. LXXIX. is an example of warp and filling, binding in a 4-leaf twill. Both 
 systems are illustrated for a clear understanding : ■ Fig. A, indicates the raising 
 of the harness for forming the upper part of the shed ; □ Fig. (3, indicates the rotation 
 of drawing warp-threads from the upper shed into the lower shed. Drawing-in draft 
 is for 4-harness (straight). 
 
 Fig. LXXXIV. 
 io-Leaf Satin. io-Leaf Satin. 
 
 naaaanaaaa 
 nar.::i:aaaaa 
 ai. :;a 
 aaaaaaaaia 
 
 □aMaaaaaaa 
 nagaanaaa* 
 
 nnHJaaaaaa 
 
 Filling. 
 
 ■■■■■::■■■■ 
 ■■iiiiii ■ 
 
 ■ bbiibiii 
 
 ■ in aaaaa 
 
 s m icjs IBB 
 
 Warp. 
 
 Fig. LXXXV. 
 io-Leaf Satin. 5-Harness Satin. 
 
 Filling. 
 
 ■■■ iobb ■ 
 
 BaWBcr:: 
 
 IB BBBB 
 ■■■• ■■•■ 
 
 ■::■■■■::■■■ 
 
 ■■■1111 ■ 
 
 III! III! 
 
 ■■ bbbb aa 
 
 ■■■■■■■■ 
 
 Warp. 
 
 Fig. LXXXVI. 
 12- Harness Satin. 
 
 —;-:■■ 
 
 on 
 
 □nannnnn: 
 
 _aaai 
 ar:naaai: 
 
 :a 
 
 gaatMaaa 
 jULlunnaz 
 oaMDanac 
 
 naaaaam 
 
 innnnnn nrrn ni 
 
 aaaaaaaaa': 
 
 a 
 
 J3qaaaanMaa 
 
 laaaaaaaaaaa 
 
 .^aaaai 
 ■aaaaaac 
 
 Filling. 
 
 ■■■■■ 
 
 : ■ 
 
 BB IllDHMI 
 
 ■■■■■■■■I ■■ 
 
 ■a 
 ■ ■■■■ 
 
 BBB ■■■■■■■■ 
 
 Warp. 
 
64 
 XIII. — Tying-up Jacquard Looms for Gauze Fabrics. 
 
 Gauze fabrics are produced by a separate system of weaves, which have the 
 peculiar characteristic of warp-threads not lying parallel to each other. One kind of 
 this warp is called the " douping warp " or "whip-threads ;" these are twisted around 
 the ground-warp. The ground-threads, as well as the whip-threads, which work 
 together, must be drawn into one dent. 
 
 Jacquard gauze can be worked in various ways ; for example : One whip-thread 
 against one or more ground-threads. More than one whip-thread against one or 
 more ground-threads. 
 
 There are two methods of tying-up for gauze fabrics : ist. A tie-up in which the 
 doups are worked by one, two, three or four shafts in front of the Jacquard harness. 
 2d. A tie-up in which the gauze figuring is done all over the fabric, requiring each 
 doup to be arranged for working separately. If the ground-threads and whip-threads 
 are worked from the same Jacquard machine, the latter must be divided into two 
 sections : ist section for the ground-threads with ground heddles ; 2d section for the 
 whip-threads with standard heddles. 
 
 If a fabric contains the gauze in the form of a stripe, arranged one end ground 
 and one end whip, the same number of hooks are required for the ground and whip- 
 threads of each section, and an extra dead harness must be employed; but if this 
 arrangement of one end ground and one end whip must form figures, then the 
 ground and whip-threads must form the first section, and the whip-threads alone the 
 second section. In this case the second section requires only half as many hooks as 
 the first ; and for the same reason, if we are forming figures with two ground- 
 threads and one whip-thread, the first section will contain three times as many hooks 
 as the second, etc. Very often two whip-threads are used for twisting, in which 
 case they must be drawn together in the doup. If several whip and ground-threads 
 are drawn into one reed they usually work independently at first on a regular weave ; 
 following this is the gauze weave formed by a certain number of whip-threads raised 
 either on the left or right of the ground-threads contained in the same dent. This 
 movement brings into operation the second section of the machine containing the 
 harness-cords for the standard heddles. The technical terms for these various 
 combinations are : single-thread gauze, double-thread gauze, triple-thread gauze, etc. 
 
 The tie-up most generally used requires two-thirds of the needles for ground 
 heddles and one-third of the needles for standard heddles ; hence, if using a 200 
 machine we find : 128 needles and hooks for the ground heddles, and 64 needles 
 and hooks for the standard heddles. [See Fig. LXXXVII., p. 65.] 
 
 The comber-board is divided into two sections. The rear part (%) is used for 
 the ground, the front part (1/3) is used for the standard. 
 
 Threading of the Harness. 
 
 Thread the warp into the ground heddles in the same manner as a common 
 straight-through tie-up. Then take the first left-hand thread of the warp and draw 
 it through the doup. The next two warp-threads draw above the first one on the 
 
65 
 
 J r^ Dlvijiorv 
 
 Fig. LXXXVII. 
 
66 
 
 left-hand side of the same doup. These three warp-threads must be drawn together 
 in one dent. After drawing the first pair in one dent, leave one, two, or more dents 
 empty, according to the fabric. The 4th, 5th and 6th warp-threads, also each 
 subsequent pair, are threaded the same as the first. 
 
 ■ 1! !! .■' ' 1 :■ ■ ■ 
 
 
 
 ■ ■ .;■ - TIB' 1 
 
 I ■ ■ '■ ■ 
 
 Li IB. :■ : i 
 
 ■ — -■ -■■■-■■■ .■=■■!„■ 
 
 !;::■::;■"■:■ 
 
 ■ ■-"■- 
 
 ■ ■■■ ■ a ■■■ 
 
 a a . ■ 
 
 : .1 ■ ■ 
 
 ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 
 
 ■ ■ — ■ 
 
 - ■ ran 
 
 ■■■_■ ibbb a an 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 ■ ...■,, ■■■ 
 
 ■ " ■ ■ 1 : 
 
 ■ ~~m ■_. 
 
 ■ ■ ■■■■■ ■ an 
 
 a ■ ■ :■ 
 
 ■•■"■' .■ 
 
 ■ iiiii^i'i 1 
 
 ■ '■ ■;; a 
 
 ■ a 
 
 I BBBBB B BBB 
 
 ■; 1: ■ :. 
 
 ■ ::■ ■ ■ 
 
 I IN 
 
 ■ ■■■ ■ 
 
 li ■ — ■_:■ ■ 
 
 ■ .1 ■' ■ . 
 
 i-b .a :b 
 
 . bbb::b:i 
 
 b ■ ■ 
 
 nannn * 
 
 ib a a 
 
 IBB B B 
 
 h — ■ ■ 
 
 , _ B __^ B _ 
 
 ■ ■■ ■ a 
 
 ■ ■ ■■■ 
 
 t — u - - M - 
 
 a " ' a ■ 
 
 a b b~ 
 
 1 ana. .a 
 
 1 II ■ !-■: :i 1 
 
 ~a ■■ ;i '' 
 
 i. a a: a 
 
 BBB. 
 
 ' ■. M ■ ■ 
 
 ■ ■ ■ ■■ 
 
 _a„ .a 
 
 . ■ ~ 
 
 ■ ■ '■ ■ ■ 
 
 3MnGI' B." 
 
 a 1 a 
 
 — : _ a — n 
 
 ' BBB ■■■ 
 
 ■nBBM _ B 
 
 a — cm — 
 
 ~B~~an 
 
 M ■ ■■■ I 
 
 wummbojc 
 
 ■nnnanc 
 
 ar , a 
 
 oaaiDC 
 
 ■ ■ ■ ■■ - 
 
 _libi — 11 a 
 
 ::.a 
 
 ■ ■■■:■::■■■ 
 
 - cur, a 
 
 ; a ' 
 
 n««M_.«r«i 
 
 ■BB~B_B~ 
 
 ■ 11 a: i:' 
 
 na_ _arj 
 
 *_.■ m-'BBi 
 
 ■■ ■ ■' 
 
 ■ ..a 
 
 a a 
 
 ■■■■■■ 
 
 ■ ZBLIB-BBL 
 
 racMMBnan 
 
 :..b: nna 
 "." a: : : :a 
 
 a 
 
 ■ ■: ■■■■■ 
 
 .""IB " 
 
 ■ ■ ■■■ 
 
 B 'BBB M_ . 
 
 ■ a 
 
 _b _na 
 
 bobem ■"■""■■■■ mzx 
 
 ■ a 
 
 ._.B J .a 
 
 ■ ■■ ■ ■ ■■■ ■ :■■ . 
 
 ":■::■ 1 ■ 
 
 _.. B! 1 
 
 ■ ■■■ .BraaB: '■■■ ■:: 
 cm. a "B .■ ■■ m. ■■ • 
 
 B~ ■ 
 
 1 ' ■■!!■! 
 
 ■ ' B .. 
 
 B fl 
 
 
 
 na an 
 
 nazananBr^ 
 
 cmcmzmcmcz 
 
 anananannn 
 
 anana' an innnrr" 1 
 
 cm-mz.m~mc r . c r.rz 
 
 : ■ a: a ■ 
 
 anananannni 
 
 mcm~mcmrcccci 
 
 Fig. XC. 
 
 Fig. LXXXVIII. Fig. LXXXIX. 
 
 Figs. LXXXVIII. and LXXXIX. are designed for illustrating this point. The 
 lingoes for the doups are about one-half the weight of those used for the ground 
 heddles. 
 
 Fig. XC. represents a fancy gauze to be executed in this manner. 
 
 ■••c 
 
 V 
 
 
 3»" 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 \ 
 
 
 Fig. XCI. 
 
 Fig. XCII. 
 
 Fig. XCIII. 
 
 Fig. XCIV. 
 
 Fig. XCV. 
 
 Fig. XCI. represents the threading of the harness for a gauze fabric : / g, first 
 and second warp-thread, over the doup ; h, i, third and fourth, through the doup. 
 
 Figs. XCII. and XCIII. illustrate the two movements of the harness in the 
 gauze weave. 
 
 Figs. XCIV. and XCV. illustrate the movements of the harness in the regular 
 weave : a, b, represents the comber-board ; c, the place where the doup is fastened 
 to the dead harness ; d, e, the standard heddle ; / g, h, i, the mails of the common 
 heddles. 
 
67 
 
 The following are the fourteen different movements that might be required in 
 regular weaving. The figures show the number of threads up and the number 
 down, thus 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 - equal first warp-thread up ; second, third, and fourth down. 
 =/up. 
 
 -=£-up. 
 
 - = h up, doup raised. 
 L = z up, doup raised. 
 
 - =y"and g up. 
 
 - ==g and h up, doup raised. 
 
 - = k and i up, doup raised. 
 
 - =/"and h up, doup raised. 
 
 - =f and i up, doup raised. 
 
 [Illustrated by Fig. XCIII.] 
 [See Fig. XCV.] 
 
 - — - =g and i up, doup raised. [See Fig. XCIV.] 
 -3 — . ■=./, o } and h up, doup raised. 
 — i- = g, h, and i up, doup raised. 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 9 
 io 
 1 1 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 These fourteen different movements cover all the possible changes in regular 
 weaving. The movement (7) illustrated in Fig. 8, in addition to forming the regular 
 weave, is also necessary to the formation of the gauze weave. 
 
 These few explanations clearly show the great variety of effects possible for the 
 designer ; for he can figure with the regular method of weaving, and can also figure 
 gauze weaving to exchange with regular weaving, forming a separate design on the 
 fabric. 
 
 - —/, g, and i up, doup raised. 
 
 — =f, h, and i up, doup raised. 
 
 Modifications of the Single Lift Jacquard Machine. 
 
 Having thoroughly described the construction and action of the regular 
 Jacquard machine, it now remains to illustrate and explain its modifications. 
 Among the most prominent are : 
 
 1st. The Double Lift Single Cylinder Jacquard Machine. 
 
 2d. The Double Lift Double Cylinder Jacquard Machine. 
 
 3d. The Arrangement of Substituting "Tail-cords" in place of the Hooks, etc. 
 
 I. Double Lift Single Cylinder Jacquard Machine. 
 
 The principle of this machine consists in raising the warp-threads any number 
 of times in succession without allowing the shed to close, thus performing the work 
 in nearly half the time, and with less wear and tear on the warp. 
 
 Fig. XCVI. represents the sectional cut of one row across all the griffe-bars. 
 The machine selected for the illustration is of the 1 2-row type. Jacquard machines 
 of this description have two hooks to one needle ; therefore in the drawing twenty- 
 
68 
 
 Fig. XCVI. 
 
 four hooks are represented. Two griffes are provided, each working every alternate 
 hook. 
 
 In Fig. XCVI. the sectional cut of both griffes is shown, and in Fig. XCVII. the 
 top view of both griffes ; the first set is represented shaded, the second black. The 
 
 former requires hooks Nos. i, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 
 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, and the lattter Nos. 
 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24. 
 
 This arrangement permits either hook 
 to be lifted separately by the griffes, and a 
 corresponding elevation of the leash. As 
 these griffes work in opposition, one de- 
 scends while the other ascends ; this motion 
 prevents the leash from dropping the entire 
 length of the cords, since the ascending griffe 
 catches it at half distance as the two griffes 
 pass each other. In this operation the shed 
 is never entirely closed, and a corresponding 
 gain in speed is attained. It will thus be 
 seen that the "double lift" single cylinder 
 has great advantages over the ordinary 
 machine. Of course, the warp-thread must 
 make its complete journeys up and down 
 when called for by the design ; but when 
 once up, it need not be brought down until 
 Fig. xcvii. absolutely required by the pattern. The 
 
 warp is thus subjected to less friction in working, and it is possible to use yarns 
 with less twist and obtain good results. 
 
 The advantages arising from not closing the shed may be seen in the following 
 example of a warp-thread working on an 8-leaf satin, in which seven picks are up in 
 succession. 
 
 By the single lift machine this warp-thread must travel seven times up and seven 
 times down, thus closing the shed absolutely seven times, with a corresponding wear 
 and tear. The double lift single cylinder arrangement does not require the warp- 
 thread to make these seven complete journeys to the "race-board" of the lay, but 
 instead it makes seven half trips. The saving may be shown by the following 
 analysis : Single lift machine, warp-thread, seven picks up in succession, in 8-leaf 
 satin (warp-face) requiring fourteen complete movements. 
 
 Double lift single cylinder machine requiring for the same effect : 
 Up the first time, = one complete movement. 
 
 Six times down, ) , , r 
 
 } half movements, 
 
 LjLiJ 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 Six times up, j 
 Down the last time, 
 Or eight complete movements. 
 Showing the utility of the two machines to be to each other as 8 to 14, or 4 to 7. 
 
 six complete movements. 
 one complete movement. 
 
69 
 
 Fig. XCVIII. illustrates the complete double lift single cylinder Jacquard 
 machine, as built by VV. P. Uhlinger, Philadelphia. In this drawing both griffes are 
 distinctly visible; also their mode of 
 operation by means of the double- 
 acting lever. This machine has the 
 set of hooks for each griffe-bar pro- 
 tected by a plate of sheet iron, thus 
 steadying the hooks in their motion, 
 and enabling smaller crooks to be 
 used for the latter. 
 
 Fig. IC. represents a double 
 lift single cylinder Jacquard machine 
 as built by Thomas Halton, Phila- 
 delphia, attached to a regular broad loom, (Knowles or Crompton), and tied-up for 
 upholstery work. The griffe-bars in this Jacquard machine are constructed of such 
 
 height that when lifted they never rise above 
 the crooks of the hooks, which are thrown out 
 of operation by the descent of the other griffe. 
 
 Fig. XCVIII. 
 
 IIII 
 
 % 
 
 l¥ 
 
 = 2 
 
 Fig. C. Fig. CI. Fig. CII. 
 
 Fig. C, hooks at rest. 
 
 Fig. CI., hooks I and 3, etc., raised, 
 and 4, etc., at rest. 
 
 Fig. CII., hooks 2 and 4, etc., raised, = 1 
 and 3, etc., at rest. 
 
 II. Double Lift Double Cylinder Jacquard Machine. 
 
 The principle of this machine consist's in the 
 
 combination of two separate Jacquard machines. 
 
 Two hooks (one of each machine) are connected 
 
 to one leash of the Jacquard harness, and as 
 
 each machine is operated alternately, a high 
 
 fig. ic. speed is attained, which is the purpose of the 
 
 machine. For example: 140 picks per minute (speed of loom) only requires 70 
 
 picks per minute from each part of the double lift double cylinder. 
 
 In Fig. CIII. this is clearly illustrated. It shows two 12-row machines (B and 
 P) combined, thus giving 24 griffe-bars for the complete double machine, as the 
 griffes work within each other. As explained for double lift single cylinder, every 
 alternate bar is connected with a separate griffe, and these two griffes are worked 
 alternately on the same double lever arrangement. 
 
 O to Pand O' to P', represent the two needle-boards ; Pto P and P' to R', 
 represent the two corresponding needle-boxes. 
 
70 
 
 These double lift double cylinder Jacquard machines are mostly used in the 
 manufacture of turkey-red goods and similar table-cover fabrics, using tie-ups 
 similar to the one illustrated below, which is a combination of the straight-through 
 and point tie-up, which may be alluded to once more by way of explanation in this 
 particular case. 
 
 The illustration represents a double lift double cylinder machine containing 
 two 600 machines, which equals an ordinary 600 machine for the tie-up. 
 
 *iAlai<fc BordlT Ttntri'l. 
 
 
 This tie-up contains six divisions for the centre straight-through, and requiring 
 leashes 1 to 400 from each part of the double machine. Leashes I, 12, and 400 
 (heavy lines) only are illustrated in drawing. 
 
 The borders are constructed on the point tie-up, and require leashes 401 to 
 604 from each part of the double machine. The first and last leash only are 
 illustrated. The margins between border and selvedge are worked by leashes 605 
 to 612. Centre and border are 12 rows deep, arranged in the comber-board; the 
 margin 8 rows deep, on account of working it (as is generally done) on an 8-leaf 
 
71 
 
 satin. One complete row in machine, (both parts), as well as in the comber 
 (illustrated on each side in drawing), is left for the selvedge. 
 
 Fig. CIV. represents this machine 
 (built by Thomas Halton, Philadelphia,) 
 attached to a Clipper loom. In this 
 drawing both sets of cards (one to 
 contain the even numbers, and the other 
 the uneven numbers) are clearly visi- 
 ble, and also the double lever arrange- 
 ment for working every cylinder alter- 
 nately. As the cylinders run at only half 
 speed, the wear on the cards is reduced 
 to a minimum. 
 
 III. The Substitution of Tail-cords 
 for Hooks. 
 
 Jacquard machines having this con- 
 struction are generally employed in the 
 manufacture of ingrain carpets. 
 
 Fig. CV. represents the sectional 
 cut of one row of needles across the 
 machine ; also the necessary boards for 
 
 -board, 
 
 guiding and operating the tail-cords. 
 This machine consists of two divisions 
 (I. and II.,) which are worked alter- 
 nately for the common 2-ply ingrain 
 carpet. 
 
 A, represents the top board, to 
 which the tail -cords are fastened 
 around a wire by knot shown below 
 the boards. Each board is 6 % by ^ 
 inches, with a distance of ij^ inches 
 between them. 
 
 (2, represents the "Lifter-boards" 
 (trap-boards) which are shown in top 
 view in the special article devoted to 
 the manufacture of ingrain carpets. 
 (Fig. OX., p. 74.) Its dimensions are 
 6% inches by 1 inch. Distance from 
 top-boards to lifter-boards, g}£ inches. 
 C to (D, needle-board. Arrow, S, the 
 direction of working the cylinder to- 
 wards the needles. Fto G, the needle 
 
 Fig. cv. 
 
72 
 
 box with its pin for holding the needles in position. Each needle is connected to 
 two tail-cords, as indicated in the drawing, one for figure and one for ground. H 
 and L are the two guide-boards for the tail-cords. Distance from (2 to H, 75^ 
 inches, from H to L, 8^ inches. Dimensions of each guide-board, 6^ inches 
 by Y^ inch. Each tail- cord is weighted by a small lead weight, as shown at K in 
 drawing. 
 
 In this machine the springs for the 
 needles are omitted, and a board large 
 enough to cover the ends of all the needles, 
 substituted. [See arrow, P.~] 
 
 Fig. CVI. illustrates the rear view 
 of the needle-box, B, and the board for 
 pressing the needles, A. C shows the hanger, which is attached (movable) to the top 
 of the machine. [See E, in Fig. CV.] 
 
 It. 
 
 Ti. 
 
 A. 
 
 Fig. CVI. 
 
 Tying-up of Jacquard Harness for Two-ply Ingrain Carpets. 
 
 With a General Description of the Working of the Loom and 
 Construction of the Fabric. 
 
 Two-ply Ingrain Carpet is an article composed of two fabrics, produced on 
 the reg lar double-cloth system. These two fabrics are arranged in the loom to 
 form figures by a simple exchanging of positions. A great variety of colors may 
 be put into each of these separate fabrics, (ground and figure), and the most 
 elaborate designs may be used. On every part of the carpet where these two 
 fabrics do not exchange, each works on the plain weave. The exchanging of these 
 two fabrics binds both into one, thus forming the ingrain carpet. In the manufacture 
 of this carpet four sets of warp-threads, and also four sets of filling-threads are 
 generally employed ; but, if occasionally more or less should be used, in warp or in 
 filling, or in both, in the same fabric, the principle of exchanging is still observed. 
 If employing four sets in warp and 
 
 Ground hjj 
 
 L* l*..,°U.cl 
 
 >fwl atout ,U«< 
 
 Stiot atiout >ss. a 
 
 filling, two sets of each are used for 
 forming the figure, the other two sets 
 forming the around, each of the 
 figure-threads having as its mate one 
 of the ground-threads. These threads 
 are so arranged that when a figure- 
 thread appears upon the face of the F i°- cvn - 
 fabric its mate appears upon the back, and when the figure-thread appears upon the 
 back the corresponding ground-thread appears upon the face. 
 
 To give a clearer understanding of the foregoing, a sectional cut of an Ingrain 
 carpet fabric is given in Fig. CVII. 
 
 ia tire, 
 ^runnel 
 
 Red 
 
 M«L«t... 
 
73 
 
 Suppose the filling-threads for the figure to be : 
 
 Red, indicated by heavy shaded circles ; picks 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30. 
 
 Black, indicated by full black circles ; picks 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32. 
 And the filling-threads for the ground to be : 
 
 White, indicated by empty circles; picks 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29. 
 
 Olive, indicated by light shaded circles ; picks 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31. 
 
 Fig. CVIII. 
 
 A careful examination of the drawing shows that the white threads mate with the 
 red, and the black threads with the olive, so that when one of these colors shows 
 upon the face the mating color will show upon the back, and vice versa. 
 
 As a general rule, these warp-threads are of the same color as the weft-threads ; 
 hence, every filling pick, appearing either on face or back, is bound by a warp- 
 
74 
 
 thread of the same color. The sectional cut represents four distinct effects with 32 
 picks, thus allowing 8 picks for the illustration of each part. 
 
 1st effect, picks 1 to 8, is ground up (white and olive). 
 
 2d " " 9 to 16, is figure up (red and black). 
 
 3d " "17 to 24, is 1 st effect in "s/iotadoul" (red and olive up). 
 
 4th " " 25 to 32, is 2d " " " (white and black up). 
 
 Two methods of tying-up Jacquard harness are in use : 
 
 1st, the "straight-through" principle, (known to the trade as "cross-point"). 
 
 2d, the "point" method, (known to the trade as "centre-tie"). 
 
 I. The Straight-Through Tie-up for Ingrain Carpets. 
 
 . . 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 6 
 
 \ 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 -■ •/;■ 
 
 ~ ■ - 
 
 ; ■■;■ /,■ 
 
 O o o o p 9 9 9 v <? ? 5 
 
 99 9 9 9 9 5V9 999 
 999 9 999999JI 
 
 ■. .. .,. 
 
 ' • ; : : ' 
 
 9 9 999999999 
 
 Y O v 9 9 9 9 Y 9 9 9 9 9 9! 
 
 9 
 6 
 
 Fig. CVIIL, p. 73, represents the ar- 
 rangement of the neck-cords with the heddles 
 (through the harness-cords). There are two 
 separate bottom boards in the machine, 
 marked A, B, for ground and figure; also 
 two corresponding lifter-boards, which are 
 illustrated separately by Fig. CIX. 
 
 The four journals are clearly illustrated by 
 Fig. CX. (each journal carrying its own set of 
 threads). 
 
 Fig. CIX. 
 
 The first thread in the loom (left side) will be found on the first journal. 
 " second " " " " " " third 
 
 " third " " " " " " second " 
 
 " fourth " " " " " " fourth " 
 
 This arrangement of threads, 1,3, 2, 4, is repeated throughout the fabric. For 
 an example, a carpet is shown termed "extra fine," executed on 26 "designs," 
 
 9 
 6 
 
 w 
 
 Xcom i 
 
 z 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 5 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 to 
 
 !• 
 
 IX 
 
 y\ 
 
 - 
 
 .5 
 
 tk 
 
 n 
 
 » 
 
 "j 
 
 20 
 
 
 Jounuifl^ 
 
 y 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 f 
 
 1 
 
 £• 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 ? 
 
 S' 
 
 1 
 
 
 t 
 
 •1 
 V 
 
 * 
 
 J 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 
 Cttorj 3 
 
 •4 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 4 
 4 
 
 t 
 i 
 
 • 
 
 J 
 
 ■4 
 
 4 
 
 J 
 
 j 
 
 j 
 
 E 
 
 
 t 
 
 C 
 
 •J 
 
 ■i 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 
 Fig. CX. 
 
 requiring 26 X 8, or 208 small squares for warp on the designing paper. Ingrain 
 carpets are generally woven one yard wide, having in this width two repeats or 
 divisions ; hence the number of harness-cords for the present example is as follows : 
 26 X 8 = 208 x 2, for ground and figure; 416 x 2, for two divisions, = 832 
 harness-cords (or 416 leashes) required for tying-up. 
 
I' 
 
 ->!• 
 
 Fig. CXI. illustrates the adjustment of heddle (mail) and lingo through the 
 journal, % by means of the heavy knot at b. This knot must be large enough not 
 to pass through the hole of the journal. The average measures for the present 
 drawing are as follows : 
 
 Lingo, f to g = 9 inches. 
 Heddle, e to/= 8 " 
 c to </= io " 
 Mail, d to e = -f " 
 Height of journal, b to c = il{ inches. 
 
 Connecting cord of heddle to harness-cord, a to b = 6 inches. £ 
 This drawing will explain the principle of raising the warp either 
 by means of the harness-board, (arrow i), or by means of the knot 
 through raising the journal, (arrow 2). If raised by means of the 
 harness-cord, the connecting heddle slides upwards in the hole pro- 
 vided for it in the journal; or the journal takes the place of a common 
 comber-board ; but if the journal be used for raising, the knot, b, will 
 rise with it, carrying the heddle the same as before, the harness-cords 
 becoming slack by this movement. 
 
 In Fig. CVIII., p. 73, the journals are arranged as follows : 
 
 1st journal, ) r , f White, istsetof threads. 
 
 . > tor ground, < _„ ' 
 
 2d " j s 1 Olive, 3d " 
 
 3d " \ , . f Red, 2d 
 
 4 th ■ j for fi g ure - j Black, 4 th " 
 
 In the same drawing are also represented the first eight heddles 
 (in both divisions), as connected with harness-cords 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 ; 
 also the last four heddles of the rear journal (fourth) connected with 
 their corresponding cords, 404, 408, 412, 416. 
 
 The first row (1 to 8) illustrates the principle of tying-up the 
 harness and the leasing of the heddles ; whereas the four heddles in 
 the rear (404, 408, 412, and 416) show the practical commencement of the tie-up, 
 i. e., four neck-cords in succession to four heddles of the journal. 
 
 A represents bottom-board in the machine where the neck-cords for the ground 
 harness-cords pass through. (B, the bottom-board in the machine where the neck- 
 cords for the figure harness-cords pass through. 
 
 In Fig. CIX., showing the lifter-boards, A is also used for the ground, and B 
 for the figure ; 26 rows of the machine are shown for explaining the tie-up for a 
 texture known as "extra fine," or equal to 832 heddles in the width of loom (one 
 yard). 
 
 Jacquard machines for two-ply ingrain carpets are usually constructed with 34 
 rows, and 33 y 2 of these are used. 33^ rows have 33^ x 8, or 268 needles, which 
 carry 1072 threads, the number actually used in what is termed a full " extra super." 
 Should only 30 of these be used, having 30 X 8, or 240 needles, and carrying 960 
 
 For repeat, 
 - — 238 times 
 over. 
 
 Fig. CXI. 
 
76 
 
 threads for warp, the carpet is termed " super ; " and if 25 rows, with 25x8 = 200 
 
 needles are used, carrying 800 threads, the product is called "fine" ingrain, and 
 
 represents about the lowest grade of these carpets. It frequently happens that we 
 
 find slight variations in the number of 
 threads used in the various grades of carpet 
 named. The pattern may require such a 
 change, or economy in production may induce 
 the maker to use a smaller number ; or, as is 
 done in a few instances, a manufacturer may 
 always make his " extra super" on 32 rows ; 
 but all such changes are done by a corres- fig. fig. 
 ponding depreciation of the value of the CXIV - cxm- 
 
 fabric, as compared with a full " extra super " of 33^ rows. 
 
 Fig. OX., p. 74, illustrates the full 34 rows, and indicates 26 rows used for 
 
 illustration of tie-up (4 rows 
 
 empty on each side). In 
 
 power-looms the raising of ^| 
 
 S ■ 3oui woJl 
 
 isi,^.) 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 
 *X- 
 
 IIU* ) 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 re*c 
 
 (fftvc) 
 
 
 
 
 B. 
 
 , v ^ 
 
 >^J-><J»I 
 
 
 B. 
 
 
 
 ■-- ^\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 toil' 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 9 1 
 
 <?' 
 
 & 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 <5> 
 
 & 
 
 6 
 
 the different journals is gen- 
 erally accomplished by an 
 arangement of cams, but in 
 hand-looms it is done by the 
 lifter-boards. 
 
 In Fig. CIX. the four 
 large holes on each side are 
 made for this purpose, and 
 the wires for raising the 
 journals are shown by heavy 
 lines in tie-up in Fig. CVIII., 
 p. 73. Fig. CXII. represents 
 the process of lifting the 
 journals, as follows : 
 
 First pick raises lifter- 
 board A, journal 4 ; second 
 pick raises lifter-board B, 
 journal 1 ; third pick raises 
 lifter-board A, journal 3 ; 
 fourth pick raises lifter-board 
 B, journal 2. 
 
 The two positions of the 
 four "tails" in these four 
 picks are illustrated as fol- 
 lows : Fig. CXIII., hole in 
 cylinder ; CXIV., no hole in 
 
 Fig. cxv. 
 
77 
 
 cylinder. The black spots represent the knots, either as caught in the slot or passing 
 free in the hole. 
 
 Looms tied-up on the foregoing principles have but one operation of the 
 Jacquard needles for every two picks of the loom, there being an operation of the 
 ground and figure lifter-boards in succession between the operations of the Jacquard 
 needles. Each Jacquard needle controls two tails, one connected with the warp for 
 the figure, (red and black in our example), and the other to the warp for the ground, 
 (olive and white in our example). The drawing of the lifter-boards shows the slots 
 for catching the tails in opposite directions from each other ; hence, when the figuring 
 tail of the needle is adjusted so as to be lifted by the figure lifter-board, the ground- 
 tail will not be acted on by the ground lifter-board when it rises. 
 
 To give a clear understanding of the foregoing explanations, a detailed state- 
 ment of the operations of the loom necessary in weaving a piece of the fabric is 
 shown in sectional cut Fig. CVIL, as follows : 
 
 E 
 
 0. 
 
 Color. 
 
 Lift-board for figure. 
 
 Lift-board for ground. 
 
 Journal lifts. 
 
 Threads down. 
 
 i 
 
 White. 
 
 Rises, 110 lift. 
 
 At rest 
 
 White to bind on face 
 
 Red, black, olive. 
 
 2 
 
 Red. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifts white and olive 
 
 Red. 
 
 Black for binding on back. 
 
 3 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Rises, no lift 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Olive to bind on face 
 
 Red, black, white. 
 
 4 
 
 Black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifts white and olive 
 
 Black. 
 
 Red for binding on back. 
 
 5 
 
 White. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 At rest 
 
 White to bind on face. 
 
 Red, black, olive. 
 
 6 
 
 Red. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifts white and olive. 
 
 Red 
 
 Black for binding on back 
 
 7 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Olive to bind on face. 
 
 Red, black, white. 
 
 8 
 
 Black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifte white and olive 
 
 Black. 
 
 Red for binding on back. 
 
 9 
 
 White. 
 
 Lifts red and black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 White. 
 
 Olive for binding on back 
 
 IO 
 
 Red 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Red to bind on face. 
 
 Black, white, olive. 
 
 II 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Lifts red and black 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Olive. 
 
 White for binding on back 
 
 12 
 
 BUck. 
 
 At rest 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Black to bind on face. 
 
 Red, white, olive 
 
 13 
 
 White. 
 
 Lifts red and black. 
 
 Al rest. 
 
 White. 
 
 Olive for binding on back 
 
 M 
 
 Red. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Red to bind on face. 
 
 BlaOk, white, olive. 
 
 15 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Lifts red and black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Olive. 
 
 White for binding on back 
 
 16 
 
 Black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Black to bind on face 
 
 Red, white, olive. 
 
 17 
 
 White. 
 
 Lifts red and black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 White. 
 
 Olive to bind on back. 
 
 1 8 
 
 Red. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Red to bind on face. 
 
 Black, white, olive. 
 
 19 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Olive to bind on face. 
 
 White, red, black. 
 
 20 
 
 Black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifts white and olive 
 
 Black. 
 
 Red to bind on back. 
 
 21 
 
 White. 
 
 Lifts red and black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 White. 
 
 Olive to bind on back. 
 
 22 
 
 Red. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Red to bind on face. 
 
 Black, white, olive. 
 
 23 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Al rest 
 
 Olive to bind on face 
 
 White, red, black 
 
 24 
 
 Black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifts white and olive. 
 
 Black. 
 
 Red to bind on back 
 
 25 
 
 White. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 White to bind on face 
 
 Olive, red, black. 
 
 26 
 
 Red. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifts white and olive. 
 
 Red. 
 
 Black to bind on back. 
 
 27 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Lifts red and black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Olive. 
 
 White to bind on back 
 
 28 
 
 Black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Black to bind on face 
 
 Red, white, olive 
 
 29 
 
 White. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 White to bind on face 
 
 Olive, red, black. 
 
 3° 
 
 Red. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Lifts white and olive. 
 
 Red. 
 
 Black to bind on back 
 
 31 
 
 Olive. 
 
 Lifts red and blai'k. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Olive. 
 
 White to bind on back- 
 
 32 
 
 Black. 
 
 At rest. 
 
 Rises, no lift. 
 
 Black to bind on face. 
 
 Red, white, olive. 
 
 Fig. CXV., p. 76, illustrates a fabric design for an ingrain carpet, straight- 
 through tie-up, a and b forming one repeat, (or one division), equal to one-half yard. 
 
78 
 II. The Point Tie-up for Ingrain Carpets. 
 
 This method of tying-up is based upon the straight-through tie-up principle, 
 arranged as follows: The design in the fabric repeats from its centre equally towards 
 each selvedge. centre. 
 
 Figs. CXVI. and CXVII. illustrate two fabric designs, a to b, L— -"^T" 
 the width of the fabric or one yard on the loom ; c is the centre ||j£, e s <fg e ; 
 
 Fig. CXVI. 
 
 or point of the design ; b to d is the repeat of a to c, where the widths are sewed 
 together. 
 
 Fig. CVIII., p. J2>> shows the first and last rows, also the two centre rows of 
 the journals threaded to the neck-cords (tail-cords) of the machine. Each cord is 
 numbered to correspond, a, b, c, d, represent the cords for lifting the journals, on 
 the same principle as in the straight-through tie-up. 
 In power-looms this is done by a cam arrangement. 
 Fig. CXIX., p. 80, is designed to give a thorough 
 understanding of the adjustment of harness-cords 
 to heddles, as well as the leasing of the latter. The 
 numbers selected for indicating the different cords 
 correspond with those used in Fig. CXVIII. 
 Journal i — white, } 
 
 " 2 = olive, } g round - 
 
 " 3 = red, ) 
 
 " 4 = black, 1 fi S ure - 
 
 Fig. CXVII. 
 
7y 
 
 Fig. CXVIII. 
 
 Arrangement of threading; a to b, 51 times repeated, = 408 cords. 
 
 The last row in the half width illustrated separately by c to d, 
 
 which is the same as a to b, = 8 " 
 
 6" forms the centre or point ; e to f, first row of each journal, 
 near centre, (repeat of centre-cord for ground or figure 
 omitted; see on journals 2 and 4), =16" 
 
 g to h, 50 times repeated, = 400 " 
 
 i to k, last row, same as g to h, = 8 " 
 
 Total number of cords used, 
 
 416 
 
 414 
 
 830 
 
80 
 
 The following is the method employed in drawing for indicating the different 
 colors of warp-threads : 
 
 Blank for white, | Heavy shaded for red, 
 
 Light shaded for olive, }g round - Black for black, 
 
 ' [figure. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "■ ■ m 
 
 »" 
 
 -»-i 
 
 5U„ 
 
 °*~+ JI^P 
 
 -p>* ppi^ w 
 
 
 
 rr 'i 
 
 
 _■ 
 
 sJiLi ■ 
 
 : : : p : : : J : : : 
 
 ! • : : : j : 
 
 ■ X 
 
 * : TI ~f 
 
 ■;« 
 
 
 Xti 
 
 
 : » ; :»:::?: 
 
 : »:: : 
 
 t X 
 
 X 
 
 ' * T 
 
 * 
 
 Otiyt 
 
 
 J:<: ::<::* 
 
 . o ■ 
 
 x 
 
 ?: 
 
 ■ ■ xl- 
 
 
 MtiU 
 
 
 *:}:: «: ::?:: 
 
 : :?: .J 
 
 X 
 
 • X 
 
 x ~T~ 
 
 1 
 
 
 Hir, . . 5 * ■* » 
 
 S;;:;f: 
 
 » s » • j a» is? ?i 
 
 ;!■--} 5,S 
 
 s;#j* 
 
 
 
 
 Ji < 
 
 
 
 
 sDu—t. 
 
 <:. ' soK«» 
 
 Fig. CXIX. 
 
 The beauty of an ingrain carpet consists in its color combination. In hand- 
 looms the common batten is used in connection with a shuttle which is somewhat 
 curved, a form most suitable to being thrown by the hand. The batten naturally 
 falls towards the weaver by its own gravity, being usually worked a little out of a 
 vertical line for that purpose. In this method the shed forms its own shuttle-race, 
 or bed upon which the shuttle slides. When two or more shuttles are used, 
 
 Fig. CXX. 
 
 they are laid on the woven piece of 
 carpet before the weaver, and he 
 selects them as required. If a solid 
 shuttle-race is connected to the batten, 
 the warp-threads are pressed down 
 upon it and the shuttle slides upon 
 the ridge of the warp-threads. In 
 this case the "fly-shuttle" is used, and 
 also the "drop-box;" the latter being 
 operated by some of the reserve nee- 
 dles of the Jacquard machine. 
 
 Fig. CXX. shows a shuttle-box 
 
 Fig. CXXI. 
 
81 
 
 mechanism for carpet hand-looms. As already stated, the four journals in power- 
 looms are lifted by cams or similar contrivances. In Fig. CXXI. (representing the 
 Crompton carpet loom) this cam arrangement is clearly visible; the cams are 
 situated above the journals, the latter being lifted by means of the journal rods 
 from above. The loom carries four shuttle-boxes at each end of the lathe ; any 
 
 FIG. CXXII. 
 
 one of the series at either end can be brought into line with the shuttle-race at 
 any pick. 
 
 In some looms the journals are also lifted from below, as shown in Fig. CXXII., 
 representing the " Knovvles " carpet loom. In this the journals are controlled by a 
 chain motion, instead of a cam, operating either journal at will, which can not be 
 done on a loom where the journals are actuated by cams. This permits the shading 
 of a fabric to be changed without cutting out the warp and re-drawing it. The box 
 mechanism (four boxes on each side of the lathe) is positive, and controlled by a 
 chain on the same shaft as the journals, and may be used with the chain alone, or 
 
82 
 
 with the chain in combination with the cards. The motion can be run forward or 
 reversed at will, and any box called as desired. 
 
 Before closing this article, it is necessary to mention the method of working 
 the loom built with a stationary "shuttle-raceway" and an independent "comb," the 
 latter having a reciprocating movement for beating up the filling, and a rising and 
 falling motion for bringing the comb up into, and taking it out of the warp ; it has 
 also yielding racks and filling forks, and a cam so timed for operating the forks, 
 that the latter will seize the filling and carry it forward in front of the range of 
 the said comb. 
 
 Fig. CXXIII. illustrates the side view of the comb and its lay ; also the parts 
 necessary to be shown for working the same : k, the independent lay ; d, the 
 comb ; c, the reed ; a, its lathe ; b, the shuttle-race ; c, the breast beam of loom ; 
 oval ring, d, e, g, represents the motion of the comb in beating up the filling ; e, r, 
 upper shed of the warp ; e, t, lower shed of the warp ; x, the shed ; h, stud fixed to 
 the loom framing ; //, i, to i, k, toggle connection of lay to stud, // ; i, m, to m, /, 
 crank connected at i to the toggles ; /, crank shaft ; p, o, lever for raising and lower- 
 ing the lay, k ; n, its fulcrum ; s, grooved cam for working lever, p, o. 
 
 Fig. CXXIII. 
 
 Fig. CXXIV. 
 
 The vibratory movement of the comb-lay for beating up the filling is produced 
 by the action of the cranks upon the toggle connections ; and the upward and 
 downward movement of the lay, to produce the entrance of the comb into the warp 
 and its withdrawal therefrom, is produced by the action of the lever upon the 
 grooved cam. The comb, d, is constructed of teeth, which are secured together by 
 a bolt passing through them, and which have their bases of dovetail form to enable 
 them to be secured between a dovetail lip, on the lay, and a dovetail clamping plate, 
 secured to the lay by bolts. 
 
 Fig. CXXIV. illustrates the method of lifting the journals from below. The 
 journals, of which there are four, are arranged to work in upright fixed guides on 
 the loom framing, d, e, /, g, and are operated by treadles, which are arranged in 
 pairs below, each journal being connected with one pair of treadles by two rods at 
 
 
83 
 
 its opposite ends. These treadles are operated by cams for each pair of treadles 
 and each journal. 
 
 Fig. CXXV. represents the top view of the "fixed guides" containing the 
 
 @ ■. 
 
 t \ © 3 
 
 ™j 
 
 I ® Z. 
 
 r± 
 
 ^_L 
 
 Fig. CXXV. 
 
 journals. This loom is provided with ten shuttle-boxes, (seven for the revolver,, 
 three upright), for each side, and built by the Furbush Machine Company, being 
 a combination of their older carpet loom known as the "Murkland," and the 
 "Duckworth Carpet Loom." 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 Preparing and Stamping of Jacquard Cards. 
 
 Preparing. 
 
 The Jacquard card consists of a strong, durable pasteboard cut to the exact 
 size of the cylinder. For cutting or preparing the cards to the required size, a table 
 is used with the different sizes of cards indicated on its surface. A sharp steel 
 blade is adjusted to the side of the table. A heavy knife of sufficient length, and 
 containing a second steel blade, is secured to a projecting bolt on the rear end of 
 the table, allowing enough play for the knife to be easily raised and lowered. The 
 blade of the knife works close against the blade fastened to the table ; and when 
 pressed down both blades rest close together. On the front side of the table is a 
 long groove in which is a guide, fastened by a bolt and nut. This guide can be set 
 to suit any of the marks on the table, thus regu- 
 lating the size of the cards to be cut. 
 
 Two measures (the length and the width) 
 are required to be cut for each set of cards : 
 ist. The sheets of pasteboard are required 
 to be trimmed one way in sufficient number for 
 the length of the cards. 2d. Each trimmed sheet 
 is afterwards separated in strips of the required 
 width. 
 
 Card Stamping. 
 
 The oldest method for stamping cards, now 
 only occasionally used, consists of two perforated 
 steel plates, between which the blank cards are 
 placed, and the required holes stamped by hand 
 by means of punches. It will easily be seen that this method is not up to the 
 present advanced times, hence various machines have been introduced for arranging 
 the punches. Among those most generally used are : 
 
 I. — Dobby Card Punching Machines. 
 II. — Piano Card Stamping Machines. 
 III. — Repeating Machines. 
 
 85 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
86 
 
 I. Dobby Card Punching Machines. 
 
 These machines, illustrated by Fig. i., (W. P. Uhlinger, builder), are used for 
 stamping cards for the smaller Jacquard machines, technically termed " Dobbies." 
 They are of very compact build, and operated by belt-power. The whole card is 
 punched at one revolution or stroke. The rack on top of the machine holds the 
 design. The punches for peg-holes and lace-holes are immovable, while the key 
 punches act independently, at the will of the operator. Jacquard cards for these 
 machines are generally composed of the strongest pasteboard, and require a very 
 strongly constructed machine. 
 
 II. Piano Card Stamping Machines. 
 
 These are operated in two ways, by the belt or foot-power. There are two 
 kinds of each: "French index" and "American index." 
 
 Figs. 2 to 1 1 are drawn to one-half the actual size of the "Uhlinger Card 
 Stamping Machine." 
 
 Figs. 13, 16, 17, 18, 19 are drawn to one-quarter the actual size of the " Royle 
 Card Stamping Machine." 
 
 Figs. 2 and 13 (B, F, G, H,) represent the top view of the head (cover taken 
 off), the twelve holes for holding the punches for one row, also the large hole for 
 holding the peg, P. Each punch works vertically, and is guided by a key for 
 stamping the hole. 
 
 Fig. 14 illustrates the punch (actual size) as used in the "Royle" machine: a 
 to b = ^ inch ; b to c = 2 j^ inches ; -^ inch diameter of punch, d to c. 
 
 Fig. 15 illustrates a corresponding key: diameter of key -^ inch, d to e; 
 diameter of head, 3^ inch, a to b ; c is the hole for inserting the pin which holds the 
 spring. The length of the keys vary from i5/£ to 2% inches, according to the 
 position they occupy in the machine. The punch and key of the Uhlinger machine 
 are shown (one-half of actual size) in Figs. 4 and 5. 
 
 A and (3, in Figs. 2 and 13, represent the piston for guiding the head in its 
 vertical motion. 
 
 Fig. 3 represents the front view of the head. The numbers and letters 
 indicating the different parts correspond with Fig. 2. 
 
 The principle of construction and action of the heads in both kinds of machine 
 are similar. Each key is provided with a fine spiral spring, which, after every action 
 of the key, returns it to its original position. The key for the peg-hole is controlled 
 by the larger spring, S, D, in Figs. 2 and 13. The arrows in these two drawings 
 indicate the direction taken by the keys when under pressure. 
 
 When cutting cards eight rows deep, the thumb of the right hand works the 
 key for the peg-hole ; the eight keys in the rear of the machine (which are the ones 
 to be used) are worked by the four fingers of each hand. 
 
 When cutting cards twelve rows deep, the eight keys in the rear are operated 
 by the eight fingers in the same manner; but the thumb of the right hand operates 
 
87 
 
 n itwiU u u u u oil 
 ©©"©©©©©©••©• 
 ■ 10. j. 1. 1 6. a t. \ n n 
 
 Mr 
 
 it w r Z. 1' 
 
 Q O Q Q O 
 
 12. 11 10 9 8 1 P. fe 5 h 3 t I. 
 
 H 
 
 D. 1 
 
 T"l 
 
 Fig. 7. 
 
 MJJJ1 
 
 Fig. S. 
 
 A. 
 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 Pic. 10. 
 
keys marked i and 2, and the thumb of the left hand operates keys marked 1 1 
 
 and 12. 
 
 During the cutting operation the fingers should not be removed from the keys ; 
 they should always be in readiness to press the required key into action, as this is 
 the only way to become expert. 
 
 The eye of the card stamper must rest uninterruptedly on his design ; and the 
 keys are called at will by the fingers, without the eye leaving the design, to find out 
 where a certain key or finger is situated at the time. 
 
 Fig. 4 shows relative positions of punch, S, and key, E, when ready for stamping 
 a hole. 
 
 Fig. 5 shows the relative positions of punch and key when no hole is required. 
 
 O represents the Jacquard card as resting in the slot of the lower head. II. in 
 Fig. 3, marked X to Z, shows a full width view of this card. 
 
 The space ©, in Figs. 4 and 5 permits the spring to be 
 inserted regulating the key. A, B, C, solid parts of the upper 
 head, (I., in Fig. 3). F, G, K, L, solid parts of the lower 
 head, (II., in Fig. 3). 
 
 The cards are passed into and through the stationary 
 part of the head at X, Z, and are attached to a "carriage" 
 in the rear of the punch head. 
 
 Two methods are employed for moving the carriage : 
 
 1st. By a "skipper" at its rear fastened to the carriage, 
 which moves in a rack of pins secured to the cutting table. 
 This method of construction is used by the Uhlinger machine. 
 Fies. 6 and 7 are front and side views of this mechanism. 
 Figs. 8 and 9, the top view and sectional cut of the rack. 
 
 2d. The rack is fastened to the carriage, and the 
 skipper to the table, thus reversing the first method. [See 
 Fig. 19, top view.] This method of construction is employed in the Royle machine. 
 
 The distance of the pins in the racks in both systems of construction (American 
 and French) corresponds to the distance of the rows in the card. The racks are 
 generally constructed for 600, 900, and 1 200 Jacquard machines. Of these three 
 sizes the 1 200 is the most advantageous, as cards can be cut for any smaller size 
 machine. The rack of a 900 machine (French index) contains 88 pins, while that 
 of a 1200 machine (French index) contains 114 pins. 
 
 Fig. 10 illustrates the "catch" for holding the cards in the Uhlinger machine. 
 This is fastened to the carriage when pressed by the hand on top in the direction 
 of arrow, S; this catch will compress spring, D, in the direction of arrow, S', thus 
 opening the "blade," C, (front view shown by Fig. 1 1), in the direction of arrow, S", 
 thus allowing the card to be inserted and held, securely fastened to the carriage. 
 
 Fig. 18 illustrates the side view of the carriage and its catch for holding the 
 Jacquard card as used in the Royle machine. Arrow, 5, indicates the pressure 
 of the operator's hand on lever, B, when the card is inserted. This lever presses 
 by means of presser, D, in the direction of arrow, S', on the double-acting lever, E, 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
89 
 
 Fie. 19. 
 
90 
 
 at c. This lever moving around its fulcrum, e, will lift catch, F, in the direction of 
 arrow, S", thus allowing the card to be inserted. Spring, G, fastened to main part 
 of carriage, A, by means of screw, a, secures the card to the catch. C, C', are the 
 carriage wheels, of which there are four. 
 
 Fig. 19 represents the top view of Fig. 18, and is designed to show the 
 arrangement of levers, wheels, and catches of the complete rack as used for a 900 
 machine. The letters indicating the different parts correspond with the ones used 
 in Fig. 18. 
 
 Fig. 16 shows top view and ground plan, and Fig. 17 the front elevation of the 
 "card-guide," as constructed on the Royle machine. It is universal and self- 
 adjusting to any width of cards from ^ to 3^ inches ; both guide-plates, C and D, 
 are caused to move equally toward 
 or away from the peg-punch, thus 
 accurately centering the peg-hole in 
 all cards. 
 
 Letters A, (B, P, and numbers 
 1 to 12, correspond to those used 
 in Fig. 13. £, F, H, K, are the 
 three levers moving around pin, G, 
 (the latter in even line with the 
 centre of the peg-hole, P). These 
 levers are held by screw, L, in any 
 required position. Spring, 6", holds 
 lever, F, H, against pin, T, which 
 in turn is fastened to the same plate 
 as screw, L. 
 
 Fig. 16 indicates the card-guide 
 set for a 1 2-row card. Let us sup- 
 pose it necessary to cut an 8-rovv 
 card. Loosen screw, L, and spring, 
 5", will instantly contract until each 
 side of the guide has moved the re- 
 quired distance (two holes and two 
 spaces between holes) towards the 
 
 centre. Much valuable time is saved Fig. 20. 
 
 by the use of this guide, as it instantly adjusts itself to any width of card, and at the 
 same time centralizes each card passed through the machine. In factories where 
 broken cards require to be constantly renewed, the value of this guide is especially 
 noticeable, there being no material interruption of the regular work of the operator, 
 who can replace the damaged card at the moment wanted. 
 
 Letters indicating the different parts in Fig. 17, correspond to those used in 
 Fig. 16. As mentioned before, the pistons, A and (B, of the cutting head are con- 
 nected below the table to the cutting levers, and by a simple combination of levers, 
 
91 
 
 the cutting pedal is brought in direct relation to the cutting lever ; all of which are 
 illustrated in the perspective view of the Royle machine in Fig. 20, and the Uhlinger 
 machine in Fig. 12. The working of the cutting pedal is very simple. Pressing 
 the pedal, situated at the right, causes the punch head to descend, and the punch 
 penetrates the card. Transferring the pressure from the right to the left pedal raises 
 the punch-head to its former position, (punches above card), ready for a repetition of 
 these movements. The "skip" arrangement allows the carriage to advance the 
 
 distance from one pin to the other in the 
 card-rack, thus placing the card in proper 
 position under the punches. 
 
 At the proper height above the punch- 
 head is the reading-board, on which the 
 guide-rules are moved across the design 
 by screws, which are connected by gearing 
 and operated by means of the hand-wheel 
 or crank shown on the lower side of the 
 board. As drawing-pins or thumb-tacks 
 are generally used as fastenings for the 
 design, the reading-board is made of soft 
 wood, and its trimmings are made of hard 
 wood. 
 Fig. 21 illustrates the Uhlinger Card Stamping Machine 
 operated by belt-power. Being the same in principle as the foot- 
 power machine, it is only necessary to state that instead of work- 
 ing the machine by means of the cutting pedals, it is done 
 automatically by simply touching any of the keys that operate 
 the punches ; thus the machine makes one stroke and punches 
 the required holes. 
 
 The Stamping of Cards. 
 
 Before commencing this work a clear conception of the tie-up 
 and leasing of the heddles is required. The holes in the cards for 
 the needles to penetrate, or the spots in cards where no hole is to 
 be stamped, must be arranged in an uninterrupted chain from one row to the other 
 until all the rows are taken up. As previously mentioned, the method observed 
 in tying-up the loom is the guide for stamping the cards. The number of ends re- 
 
 5Zs = siIS = s=-s-ss-s-ss— * . ■- ■ - ■"> 
 
 s 4i5SSriSnSSlS3KiiS5H«5DS5l*inn.annn«nnnn.nni 
 
 c 
 
 Fig. 23. 
 
 quired in a certain design may repeat only once in the number of hooks and needles 
 
 employed in the Jacquard machine ; or they may repeat two, three, or more times. 
 
 Fig 23 illustrates a design upon 40 warp-threads. Fig. 22 shows the corre- 
 
 A. B. 
 o o 
 
 •• •••• 1 
 
 •••• •• 
 
 ■<o. • e 
 •• • •••u 
 
 •••• •• 
 
 80. • • 
 • • ••••&!. 
 
 •••• •• 
 
 1'iO • • 
 •• •••• 
 
 •••a ®o 
 
 ••• ©oco 
 
 l&o. • • 
 •• •••• 
 
 •••• •• 
 
 2001 • • 
 •••••••0 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 C B 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
92 
 
 sponding card, (French index), one-fourth of its actual size, for the first pick. In a 
 200 machine this design will repeat itself five times. The lace-holes and the peg- 
 holes are blank. The reserve row (26th) is shaded, and the design as cut in card is 
 indicated by black dots. This cut also shows the direction of reading each row to 
 correspond with the numbering for the punch-heads, in Figs. 2, 3, 13, and card-guide 
 in Fig. 16. The numbers 1 to 40, 41 to 80, 81 to 120, 121 to 160, 161 to 200, indicate 
 the direction of stamping the design, as well as the five repeats to form the complete 
 card. In this connection it will be of great advantage to 
 examine Fig. XXIX., p. 28, under the head of the Jacquard 
 Machine and its Tie-ups. 
 
 Fig. 24 illustrates a Jacquard card (American index) 
 stamped for ingrain carpets, one-half of actual size. This 
 card illustrates the stamping for two textures, 1' to 208' being 
 for "extra fine." The 26 rows needed are shown full black, 
 and marked to correspond. The peg-holes and lace-holes 
 are left blank. In the other texture, or what is termed 
 " extra super" ingrain carpet, the additional rows are repre- 
 sented by the shaded holes at the ends of the cards. Arrow, 
 S, indicates the direction for commencing to read off each 
 row. 
 
 III. Repeating Jacquard Pattern Cards by the Positive Action 
 
 Repeater. 
 
 If several sets of cards of one design are required for 
 starting a corresponding number of looms, and the first set 
 has been produced by the " piano machine " exact duplicates 
 can easily be obtained at small cost to the manufacturer by 
 the " Repeating Machine." This machine is built by Messrs. 
 John Royle & Sons, Paterson, N. J., and is illustrated by Fig. 
 25 in a perspective view. 
 
 Fig. 26, p. 94, represents the front elevation of the throat- 
 piece through which the cards that are to be cut pass, the car- 
 riage on which it is supported, and the mechanism employed 
 for imparting a rising and falling motion to the carriage. 
 
 Fio-. 27, p. 95, is a vertical longitudinal section of the 
 upper portion of the machine. 
 
 Fig. 28, p. 95, gives a perspective view in detail of portions 
 of a selecting-needle and key-wire and a lever connecting 
 them. 
 
 Fio - . 29, p. 95, gives a view in detail of the mechanism 
 employed to turn the pattern cylinder. 
 
 The cards to be duplicated (A^, A^ Fig. 26, p. 94,) are 
 arranged upon the card race-arms (M, M, Fig. 26,) in the same manner as upon a 
 
 A. 
 
 B. 
 
 o-i 
 
 
 00000000 1. 
 
 OOOQOOOO 
 
 • •• 
 
 »i' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • 
 
 • •• 
 • ••• 
 
 
 • •• • 
 
 • • 
 
 • 
 
 l 
 
 I. 
 ••••••• 
 
 • • 
 • • 
 
 208.' • • • • 
 00 00 
 
 ©©OOQO O 
 ••••••• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ttfc 
 
 O 
 
 C. 
 
 E. 
 
 Fig. 24. 
 
93 
 
 loom. The uncut or blank cards, having been previously laced together, (E, E, 
 Fig. 26), are piled in the rear at the base of the column, and thence passed forward 
 through the machine, and delivered finished in front. 
 
 The perforating of the cards is performed by a vertically reciprocating die, 
 (D, Fig. 26), and a set of punches (C, Fig. 26,) carried in a fixed punch-head, and 
 capable of being pushed upward when such movem e nt is not prevented. The cards 
 commonly used are of a size to receive 600 holes, and hence that number of punches 
 are required. 
 
 The cards (E) to be cut are drawn over a "reel" or "idler" (E Fig. 26,) at 
 the back of the machine, and thence pass through openings in the base frame to the 
 front of the machine, and over a square cylinder having a step-by-step rotary motion. 
 
 Fig. 25. 
 
 By each quarter turn of this cylinder, the chain of cards is drawn forward sufficiently 
 to bring a new card in the die. By the rising movement of the die (carriage), which 
 takes place as soon as the intermittent feed of the cards has ceased, the card 
 in the throat of the machine is carried up against the lower ends of the punches, and 
 is cut or perforated by all such punches as have their upward movement prevented 
 by the keys; while such punches as are not arrested by the keys are carried upward, 
 and do not puncture the card. The pieces of card cut off fall through a throat or 
 opening in the carriage (E, Fig. 27,) into the hollow base frame, (A, Fig. 27), and 
 can be taken out at the door, (A, Fig. 26). 
 
94 
 
 It will therefore be apparent that the variations in the cards are produced simply 
 by holding down different punches in successive punching operations. This is 
 regulated by the original set of cards, (N, Fig. 26), which are passed over the 
 pattern cylinder (O, Fig. 26). The latter has also a step-by-step rotary motion 
 similar to the cylinder first described. Its four faces are covered with holes the same 
 distances apart as the perforations in the pattern cards. This pattern cylinder is 
 mounted in bearings in a carriage on the top of the machine, and is reciprocated back 
 and forth be .ween the successive rotary movements of the feed and pattern cylinders. 
 
 Fig. 26. 
 
 In the upper part of the machine are arranged what are termed selecting 
 needles, (G\ Fig. 27), which consist of wires arranged in horizontal rows, with their 
 ends opposite to the pattern cylinder, and which are the same distance apart as the 
 holes in the cylinder, so that if the cylinder were moved up by the carriage against 
 the ends of the needles, the latter would enter the holes in the cylinder, and would 
 not be moved longitudinally. There are the same number of selecting needles as 
 punches in the machine — six hundred. When, however, a perforated pattern card 
 is on the cylinder, and it is moved against the ends of the selecting needles, such 
 needles as are opposite the perforations of the cards will enter them, and will not be 
 moved, while such needles as are opposite the blank spaces of the cards will be 
 moved longitudinally. [See Fig. 27 for illustration.] At the reverse movement of the 
 
95 
 
 carriage, an "evener," which is secured to it at the end opposite the pattern cylinder, 
 strikes against the ends of all the needles so moved and pushes them back to their 
 original position. Above each of the punches before described is a horizontal sliding 
 key (D, Fig. 27,) attached to a horizontal key-wire (/?', Fig. 27), and the 600 key- 
 wires are arranged in horizontal rows below the selecting needles, and are each 
 connected by a lever (B, Fig. 27,) with the corresponding selecting needle. 
 
 Fie. 27. 
 
 Consequently, a longitudinal motion of any selecting needle will move the key-wire 
 with which it is connected in a reverse direction. 
 
 Fig. 28 gives a clear demonstration of the connection of a selecting needle, c, 
 to the key-wire,/ by means of the lever, e, movable around the fixed pin, d. Each 
 key (D, Fig. 27,) consists of a cylindrical plug of metal, which, projecting over a 
 punch, forms an abutment to keep that punch from rising, but if withdrawn, allow.;, 
 the punch to rise without resistance. 
 
 A step arrangement of the punches and keys is 
 adopted ; that is, the upper ends of the outer rows of 
 punches are highest and the punches in the several 
 rows decrease in height till the inner row is reached, 
 where the punches are the lowest. Hence, the keys 
 of the upper rows, which correspond to the outer rows 
 of punches, are carried over the inner rows of punches 
 and terminate over the punches in the outer rows. Fig. 29. 
 
96 
 
 Normally, all the keys are above the punches, and all would punch when the die 
 ascends, but when a pattern card is carried by the pattern cylinder against the ends 
 of the selecting needles, certain needles are moved and produce a reverse movement 
 of the corresponding key-wires, and draws certain keys out of reach of their punches ; 
 no resistance being offered to the upward movement of such punches, they do not 
 perforate the cards. 
 
 The carriage on which the pattern cylinder is carried being mounted directly on 
 the top of the machine, can be readily lifted off to afford access to the parts below, 
 and it is provided with a movable hood, which may be lifted to inspect the selecting 
 needles. 
 
 The keys and key-wires are arranged farther apart vertically than the selecting 
 needles, thus enabling larger keys and heavier and stronger key bearings to be used, 
 and avoiding any liability of the punches striking the keys in the tier next above 
 when those of their own tier are withdrawn. 
 
 Instead of applying a separate spring to each punch to move it downward or 
 return it as the die recedes, a positively operated returning plate is used, which 
 moves down as the die recedes and acts on collars on the punches, [see d, Fig. 27], 
 and forces all the punches down. This is very important, for if any of the punches 
 should fail to descend, the movement of their keys would be prevented, and thereby 
 the machine would fail to properly repeat. 
 
 The bearings of the pattern cylinder are so constructed that the cylinder can 
 be instantly changed to allow either a 400 or a 600-hole cylinder to be used, so that 
 the bearings can be adjusted to adapt them for either size cylinder. 
 
 The bearings of the feed cylinder, whereby the chain of cards to be cut is 
 moved, are constructed and supported so as to enable them to be readily adjusted 
 to suit slight variations in the tightness with which the cards are laced, or in a 
 Greater degree to suit large or small cards, and the mechanism whereby the 
 cylinder is operated is capable of ready adjustment for the same purpose. 
 
 It is well known that the punching of a great number of holes simultaneously, 
 even in cardboard, requires great power, and entails enormous shock and great wear 
 on the machine ; to obviate this difficulty, the punches are slightly varied in length 
 relative to their keys, so that they will not all act on the cards at exactly the same 
 instant, and the strain on the machine and power required are thereby greatly 
 reduced. 
 
 A Lace-Hole Press 
 
 Is indispensable to the machine. This is a separate little machine, designed to set 
 upon a bench or table, and is used especially for cutting the peg and lace-holes. It 
 may be operated very readily by hand, but if desired, is easily adapted to run by 
 power. The feeding is done by one motion of the hand, and once handling of the 
 rard; the cards leave the press by gravitation, and arrange themselves in piles, 
 l'he press is arranged to cut cards for 400 or 600 machines. 
 
97 
 
 The Lacing of Cards. 
 
 Two methods are observed for lacing Jacquard cards : A, hand-lacing on a 
 :ommon frame ; B, lacing by power. 
 
 A. Lacing of Jacquard Cards by Hand. 
 
 For this purpose the cards are put on a common frame containing on its surface 
 )egs of a corresponding size to those used on the cylinder. The pegs on the Irame 
 ire made of hard wood, and the pegs of the cylinder of brass. These pegs on the 
 frame are located at exact distances apart, and the frames are built to hold from 30 
 to 50 cards, superficially arranged. 
 
 Figs. 30 and 31 illustrate the frame under 5", showing at a three cards ar- 
 inged for a fabric, with a twill effect from left to right ; and at b the same cards 
 
 I 1 3 S ^ 
 
 r 1BS8, / 
 
 ' ■'■'■■■" 
 
 
 
 r». 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 •'•it 
 
 
 
 
 *: 
 
 0: 
 
 Jfil 
 
 ol U» 
 
 n tl 
 
 :o 
 
 O Ittfi. 
 
 
 
 
 .: » 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 0} 
 1 1. 
 
 JC-l ol U- Ceft 
 
 :o 
 
 Fig. 30. 
 
 Fig. 31. 
 
 arranged for a twill in the opposite direction, from right to left. These frames are 
 arranged to slide into each, so as to adapt them to the distances of the peg-holes in 
 the cards. To give a clear understanding as to the distance of these pegs from 
 each other a few measures most generally used for lacing frames are given. 
 
 1. For a 200 Machine (French Index.) 
 
 The centre of the pegs are 2-^-" apart. Width of cards 2-jfc", allowing %?' 
 for distance between the cards. Diameter of the pegs at the bottom, l{". Distance 
 of the centre of one peg to the centre of the corresponding one across the frame, 
 Jj4". Length of card, g^i". 
 
 2. For a 600 Machine (French Index). 
 
 The centre of the pegs are 3fs" apart. Width of cards, 3%", allowing 1^" for 
 distance between cards. Diameter of the pegs at the bottom, 3 S ". Distance of the 
 centre of one peg to the centre of the corresponding one across the frame, 14^". 
 Length of card, 16^". 
 
 3. For an Ingrain Carpet Machine (American Index). 
 
 The centre of the pegs are 3" from each other. Width of cards 2^", allowing 
 i/£" for the distance between the cards. Diameter of the pegs at the bottom, y % ". 
 Distance of the centre of one peg to the centre of the corresponding one across the 
 frame, \\){" Length of card, 13%". 
 
98 
 B. Lacing of Jacquard Cards by Machine. 
 
 Different styles of machines are constructed for doing this work, among which 
 we find machines requiring two needles for each series of holes in the Jacquard 
 cards, and machines using one shuttle in connection with each needle. The 
 Jacquard cards mostly needed are for machines containing 400, 600, etc., hooks and 
 needles. 
 
 The Jacquard cards for these sizes have three series of lace-holes, and the 
 number of needles, or needles and shuttles, used in the machine, is proportionally 
 increased. 
 
 The Method of using Two Needles for Lacing each Series of Holes 
 Is the one most extensively employed, hence we will take this machine (VV. P. 
 Uhlinger, Phila., builder,) for the subject. 
 
 Fig. 32. 
 
 Fig. 32 represents the perspective view of a lacing machine for 600 Jacquard 
 cards. The table is located at a convenient height, and is 33^ by 36^ inches. 
 Two grooves, each 1^ inches by 26^ inches, are located five inches from front and 
 rear respectively, and 9^ inches from each side. A third groove of the same size 
 is situated in the centre, 6yj-inches from the others. An endless chain runs in each 
 groove, consisting of 24 links, corresponding in length to the width of the card to be 
 laced. Each link of the two outside chains has a peg of a size corresponding to the 
 one used on the cylinder in the Jacquard machine. 
 

 99 
 
 
 Fig. 33 illustrates the side view of a link, and the method of jointing: a, the 
 peg ; c, the joint of link ; the length of each link being 3^ inches, and the height 
 
 F' G - 33- 
 
 y 2 inch at the joint ; the diameter of the pegs at the bottom, % inch ; the height of 
 each peg, yi inch. . 
 
 Fig. 34 shows the top view of Fig. 33, illustrating two complete links. The 
 body of each link is 2 ).{ inches long ; the head, S/ % inch long ; the slot, 1 inch long. 
 a represents the peg ; e the empty spaces between each pair of links, to receive the 
 
 
 Fig. 34. 
 
 teeth (j4 inch high) of wheel (8 inches diameter, Fig. 36). This wheel holds and 
 guides the endless chain ; also imparts the required movement to the cards. It is 
 regulated by a cam arrangement. [See Fig. 35.] 
 
 
 Fig. 35. * Ia - 36. 
 
 Two needles are required for each of the three series of lace-holes, or six 
 needles in all. The process of lacing each series is the same ; as the three 
 horizontal working needles are connected to one rod ; thus, by working this rod, 
 they are operated correspondingly. The three vertical working needles are arranged 
 in the same manner, and also the three loop-guides. 
 
 Ficr. 37 shows a top view of one of the loop-guides, 
 d, a, c. The dotted lines near a represent the position 
 of the corresponding "presser" for the cards during the 
 lacing process. Length of strip c, — 5 inches ; length of 
 strip d, = 13 inches; width of each strip, = ^ inch; 
 width of empty space, between c and d, — 3^ inch, b 
 indicates the top view of the vertical working needle. 
 Arrow, S, direction the cards run while being laced. As 
 
 Fig. 37. 
 
 previously mentioned, two needles are required for each series of lace-holes. 
 
100 
 
 
 Fig. 39. 
 
 Fig 38 shows the top view of the needle, which works in a horizontal direction. 
 Fig. 39 side view of the same. Fig. 38 is shown threaded, whereas Fig 39 is not 
 threaded, so as to give a clear view of the eye. This needle is fastened to its holder 
 by means of screw, d; the blade of the 
 needle extends 3^ inches ; width of 
 needle at bottom, -^ inch. =S3£H 
 
 Two different sets of lacing twines 
 are used, viz. : 
 
 1st. Set of fine thread running from three spools shown in a vertical 
 position on the side of the machine, used for threading the needles 
 running in a horizontal direction. In our explanation we denote this 
 twine with "a." (7-ply, No. 14 soft laid mule yarn.) 
 
 2d. The set of heavy twine running from spools arranged horizon- 
 tally near the bottom in rear of machine is threaded to the vertical 
 needles. This twine is indicated by "6" in our explanations. (No. 24 
 braid banding.) 
 
 In Fig. 38, arrow, e, illustrates the twine, " a," as coming off the 
 spools. On the bottom of the "holder" is an extension which is sepa- 
 "'' 3 ' rately illustrated in its front view by Fig. 40. This extension contains 
 a pin marked k, which guides the twine into the hole, /; (e and arrow in Fig. 38 cor- 
 respond with e and arrow in Fig. 40). 
 
 The position of this twine in working is shown in Fig. 38. C, the crossing of the 
 two twines preparatory to forming the loop, is illustrated. The mechanical construc- 
 tion is such that needle, a, is withdrawn from loop at the same time needle, b, 
 commences to rise, placing the twines in position shown in Fig. 
 PA 41. Needle, b, will in turn pull down as soon as needle, a, is 
 ready for moving forward. By moving needle, b, down, its twine 
 will form a loop, [see Fig. 42], held in its position by the " loop- 
 guide," Fig. 37. Through this loop, needle, a, is again inserted. 
 Needle, b, will leave the card below as soon as needle, a, is in its fig. 40. 
 loop. At this juncture the cards will be moved by means of the 
 catch and chain of links one hole or one space between cards, 
 whichever may be required. After this is done, needle, b, will 
 rise in its new place, and at the same time needle, a, commences , /] 
 its backward journey through the loop shown and explained in /!, 
 Figs. 38 and 41 at the beginning ; thus ready for a repetition of ft- 
 the two movements. 
 
 The foregoing explanations will give the principle of this FlG 42 
 card-lacing machine as follows : "One needle holds the other s twine 
 until the other needle has moved one point ahead." 
 
 Lacing Machine working with One Needle and One Shuttle for each Series of Holes. 
 
 Fig. 43 illustrates the side elevation. Fig. 44 illustrates the front elevation. 
 The construction of this machine and its working are as follows: 
 
 Fig. 41. 
 
101 
 
 Over the prisms, B, C, D, of the same size and shape as a cylinder of the 
 Jacquard machine, run three endless chains. Surrounded by this endless chain is 
 the shuttle-box, E, with three shuttles, one of which is illustrated in Fig. 45. On 
 each of these shuttles a toothed rod, K, is fastened, the teeth of which work in the 
 circles, H, H, as soon as a shuttle is put in its lay, J. This toothed rod, which 
 runs underneath the circles, H, is used to move the shuttles to and fro. L 
 indicates the pulleys for driving the machine. M' and O, O', the gear-wheels ; Q, 
 the lever, and P, its guide, connected as shown. The bent needles, Z, work in 
 connection with the shuttles, E. These needles are tubes through which the twine 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 43. 
 
 for lacing from spools, A, are passed. These tubes are adjusted to rod, S, which 
 swings around pin, T, and gets its motion from rod, U, V, W. 
 
 The Jacquard cards are placed on the machine at <B', and move in rotation 
 under needle, Z. The movement of the cards must be so regulated that, notwith- 
 standing the want of uniformity in the arrangement of the holes, each hole in turn 
 must come directly under the lacing needles. 
 
 The lacing of the cards is produced as follows : After the cards have moved 
 one hole, the needles, Z, lower to P', Fig. 43, making the shed. The shuttles move 
 
102 
 
 with their points under the thread thus lowered by the needle, and pass clear 
 through the loop. After the needles rise, they will in turn tighten the loop, the 
 shuttles return to their original position, and the work repeats. 
 
 v^3 
 
 Fig. 44. 
 
 This method of lacing Jacquard cards has the disadvantage of compelling the 
 machine to be stopped oftener than if using the two-needle system (Fig. 32), as the 
 shuttles will only hold a small quantity of lacing twine. 
 
 Fig. 45. 
 
PRACTICAL HINTS 
 
 TO 
 
 LEARNERS OF JACQUARD DESIGNING. 
 
 Designers for Jacquard work, in addition to being good draughtsmen, must be 
 thoroughly acquainted with the three systems of weaves : plain, twills and satins, 
 and their sub-divisions; also with the structure of double cloth, three-ply cloth, four- 
 ply cloth, etc. He must know the influence of the texture upon the weaves and the 
 fabric; the arrangement of the threads in the dents of the reed; the different 
 systems of tying-up the Jacquard harness ; and the stamping of the Jacquard 
 cards for the various kinds of textile fabrics. 
 
 Squared Designing Paper for the Different Textile Fabrics 
 Executed on the Jacquard Machine. 
 
 The classifying of the n designing paper is done by enclosing a number of small 
 rectangles, horizontal and vertical, within a certain distance by a heavy line. Such 
 enclosures are known in practice as " squares." The spaces between the vertical 
 lines indicate the warp-threads, and those between the horizontal lines the filling 
 threads. As a rule the warp dimension is indicated first; and a design paper having 
 five rectangles vertical with ten horizontal, is variously read and indicated as 5 by 10, 
 
 5 x io, or 5/10. t 
 
 Figs. 46 to 68 represent some of the styles of □ designing paper most frequently 
 used. The size of the square may vary in each kind of paper, and must be selected 
 according to the fabric to be sketched. For example : There are three styles of 
 8 x 8 a designing paper in general use: One forming % inch heavy squares, (Fig. 
 48), one forming % inch heavy squares, (Fig. 64), and the other forming 1 inch 
 heavy squares. These sizes may still be varied, 
 
 The principle of these three kinds of n designing paper is identical, the size 
 preferred being left to the pleasure of the designer. If a design is to be made for a 
 great number of needles, say 600, 900, 1200, etc., it will be best to use the smallest 
 size; whereas in a design for only 100 to 200 needles the larger sizes may be 
 employed. 
 
 103 
 
104 
 
 
 Fig 46 8x6 
 
 5|g: 
 
 S::H: 
 
 
 
 -:.:r= 
 
 F,0 52 . 4x8 
 
 ■iBi 
 
 
 
 F/0 58. 6<J2 
 
 ^ #j§f :iizri E 
 
 Fig 47. 8x7 Fig 53. 4xi2 Fig 59. 9x7 O 
 
 m 
 
 tx#z 
 
 =pppa: 
 
 rr 
 
 mmt 
 
 Fig 48. 8x8 Fig 54 . 4x20 Fig GO. JOxJO 
 
 
 - ' | | | 1 1 rj" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ — . — , [_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 : 11 ! ! ! 
 
 
 — \\ iH" 
 
 1 i 1 i i i i ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ........ . 
 
 — 
 
 Fig 49. 8x9 Fig 55. 4x24 Fig 67.40x72 
 
 n i i i ii ii i iiii 
 
 i iir i ni i iii 
 
 H'IMlll 
 
 w& 
 
 I I I ll l lil l 
 
 
 Fig 64 ■ 8x8 
 
 S| ! l i| li |(- i 
 
 i gill eh 
 
 ^ EjEtgEjEjEEH E+Er 
 rt m r: i rr rr 
 
 Fig 65 70x14 
 
 mtttffi 
 
 Fio66 fix 75 
 
 
 Fig 50. 8xiO Fig 56. 5x6 Fig 62. J2xJ2 Fig 67- 8xJ6 
 
 
 
 
 4tf 
 
 
 II 
 
 4-- 
 
 
 i 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 
 =t=F 
 
 
 
 -\ — 
 
 — 
 
 
 -4 
 
 — 1— 
 — \- 
 
 4= 
 
 L + 
 
 # 
 
 
 = T^ Z 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 1 1 1 ; 1 
 
 II 1 i 1 ! 1 
 
 =F 
 
 Fig 57. 6x72 Fig 57. 6x70 Fig 65. 24x72 
 
 
 [-1 — ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 /y^7 6'<9 . Jx/5 
 
105 
 Practical Use of the Heavy Square in Designing Paper. 
 
 The heavy square serves as a unit of measurement, as well as a means of 
 calculation, and shows readily and exactly the size of the design. The eye becomes 
 accustomed to grasping the meaning of this large square, and comprehends at a 
 glance the situation. For instance : 
 
 On 8x8 paper, 25 squares means 8 X 25, or 200 rectangles each way. 10 x 
 10 paper, 10 X 25, or 250 rectangles each way. 10 by 12 paper, 10 X 25, 
 or 250 rectangles one way, and 12 x 25, 300 rectangles the other way. 
 
 These rectangles in actual work represent threads or ends, thus : 
 200 ends on 8 X 8 paper require 25 squares. 
 300 " 10 X 10 " " 30 " 
 
 450 " 10 x 12 " " 45 squares one way. and 450 [ 12, or 37 
 
 squares + 6 lines the other way. 
 
 The squares will also assist in putting the weave in a design. For example : 
 Suppose a design for a damask table-cover is required, having for weaves the 8-leaf 
 satin. By using the 8 by 8 paper the " risers " or " sinkers " of the 8-leaf satin are 
 found in the same place in each square, thus any error in forming the weave is at 
 once detected. Sometimes more than one square is required for ascertaining this 
 fact ; suppose in the preceding example the n paper to be 10 by 10, then the number 
 of threads represented by four successive squares = 4 times io, or 40, being five 
 repeats of the 8-leaf satin, as 5 times 8 = 40. 
 
 Selection of Designing Paper for Single Cloth. 
 
 For single cloth the character of the designing paper is ascertained by the 
 number of warp and filling threads required per inch in the finished fabric. For 
 example : A damask fabric with a texture, when finished, of 8o /i 2 o (80 ends warp and 
 120 picks filling per inch) will require a designing paper of corresponding proportion, 
 or as 80 is to 1 20, = 8 x 1 2. 
 
 In stripes, checks, etc., the texture in part of the fabric is changed; such changes 
 require separate designs. If the difference is only slight, one kind of paper is 
 used. Select the paper derived through the proportion of the two as required. For 
 example : A dressgoods fabric forming two distinct effects in one repeat of 400 
 warp-threads (200 successive ends required for each effect). 
 The first effect made on a texture 6o so- 
 second " " " So /so. 
 
 Two distinct designs (one for each effect) are required : 
 
 For the first effect use a paper proportioned as 60 to 80, or 6 X 8. 
 " second *' " " " So to 80, or 8 x 8. 
 
 If only one kind ofn designing paper be used for both effects, find the average 
 of the warp, thus: 6 + 8= 14, and 14 + 2 = 7, showing that paper 7 x 8 is the 
 substitute. If using a designing paper under similar circumstances the sketch must 
 be squared to correspond. 
 
106 
 Selection of Designing Paper for Double Cloth. 
 
 In fabrics where one line (visible across the face) is produced by two or more 
 different colored threads, (each pick forming part face, part body or back of the 
 fabric'*, the designing paper to be used is shown by the proportion of the line effects 
 to the warp-threads (figure) per inch. Example: Take a dress-goods fabric, extra 
 figured in the filling, having the following texture : Warp, 60 ends per inch ; filling, 
 100 picks per inch, double system, 1 pick for ground, 1 pick for figure. The paper 
 required is as 60 : (100 -f 2) or as 60 : 50 = 12 x 10, or 6x 5. 
 
 The figure is painted upon the paper in various colors and by the card-stamping 
 when cutting the ground cards. The extra colors are treated as if they were ground. 
 When cutting for the extra figure, deal with it alone. 
 
 If a fabric has the double-cloth system applied to the warp, only using one filling 
 for both kinds of warp, and the Jacquard-harness is tied-up for "single sections," the 
 squared designing paper required is found from the proportion of the number of 
 face and back warp-threads per inch, to the number of picks per inch. Example : 
 Take a dressgoods fabric constructed on the following texture : 80 ends warp, 1 end 
 ground, 1 end figure, and 60 picks to 1 inch. The proportion for the paper is as 80 : 
 60, or 8 X 6 designing paper. 
 
 If the tie-up in the loom is for double sections, (Fig. LIV. or LVI.), the fabric in 
 the previous example requires the comparison of the face-warp with the filling, and 
 the answer is: 80-^2 or 40 ends of face-warp per inch, 60 picks filling per inch, 
 giving the proportion of 40 to 60, requiring 8 X 12, or 4X 6 designing paper for the 
 figure. The ground part of the design is executed separately on the same kind of 
 paper ; or if the weave is of a short repeat, stamped without design. 
 
 In selecting the n designing paper for double cloth, such as cloakings, coatings, 
 etc., made with a back-warp, and executed on any of the single section tie-ups, use 
 the lines between the squares to indicate the back-warp and back-filling. The 
 proportion of ends of face-warp to face-filling in one inch of the finished fabric 
 indicates the kind of paper needed. 
 
 Example : If a fabric has the following texture : 
 
 Warp, 2 ends face, 1 end back, 90 ends per inch. 
 Filling, 3 " 1 " 132 picks " 
 
 The kind of designing paper needed is found by dividing 90 by 3, and 
 multiplying by 2, thus : 90 -j- 3 x 2 = 60, number of ends of face-warp per inch, and 
 132 -r 4 X 3 = 99. number of picks filling per inch, giving a 60 X 99 paper, or its 
 equivalent, 6 X 10. 
 
 Face cards for these fabrics must be stamped twice, first for the face weave, 
 and afterward for the binder. If using a 12-row machine, use punches 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 
 8, 10, and ix, for face ; 3, 6, 9, and 12, for the back of the fabric. 
 
 Selection of Designing Paper for Two-ply Ingrain Carpets. 
 
 Always observe the proportion existing between the number of warp and filling- 
 threads. For instance, take a carpet having 1072 ends warp (536 ground and 536 
 

 107 
 
 filling) per yard, with 30 picks per inch (1 pick ground and 1 pick filling, or 15 pair). 
 Then, 1072 ^-36 = 29^ ends of warp per inch. The proposition is as 29 jf: 30 ; or, 
 what is practically the same, 30 : 30, showing that the paper must be equally divided, 
 and 8x8 may be used, as is usually done. 
 
 Again, take a carpet having 832 ends warp (416 ground, 416 figure) per yard 
 with 20 picks per inch (1 pick ground, 1 pick figure, or 10 pair). Then 832 -f 36 — 
 23-^, and the proportion is as 23-^: 20, or as yjf: 6%, practically 8:7; and 8x7 
 paper may be used. 
 
 Note. — It will always be advantageous for the card stamping if the designing paper be selected so that the number of 
 warp-ends in one square equals the number of grifife-bars used in the Jacquard machine. 
 
 Selection of the Proper Brush for the Different □ Designing Papers. 
 
 The brush used by the designer must be clipped according to the size of the 
 rectangles of the paper. It should cover the rectangle in warp direction at one 
 sweep of the hand ; hence each size of the squared paper requires a specially 
 prepared brush for quick, good, and perfect work. 
 
 Colors used For Painting Textile Designs. 
 
 For this purpose take common colors (in powder), and mix with water and 
 mucilage to avoid rubbing off after application. Use no more mucilage than 
 necessary, as too much will be followed by slow and imperfect work. Colors 
 mixed in this manner must be kept moist by adding a few drops of water daily. 
 The colors most generally used for painting textile designs are : 
 
 Vermilion. White Lead. Chrome Yellow. Cobalt Blue. 
 
 Lamp Black. Emerald Green. Burnt Umber. Carmine, etc. 
 
 A few drops of alcohol will greatly assist the mixing of vermilion, umber, and 
 similar colors which have no affinity for water. Chloride of lime is used on colors 
 having a vegetable basis (as carmine, etc.,) for correcting imperfections, applying 
 weaves or changes in the colored part of a design. 
 
 If the designing paper becomes greasy, the colors will not adhere. To cure 
 this take a moist sponge and wipe off the paper. 
 
 Preservation of Textile Designs. 
 
 To prevent textile designs (painted on the n designing paper) from being soiled, 
 apply a thin solution of white shellac varnish, which dries almost instantaneously. 
 A design preserved in this manner can be cleaned off at any time with a wet sponge, 
 and after years have passed will appear bright and distinct. 
 
108 
 
 Sketching of Designs for Textile Fabrics to be Executed on 
 
 the Jacquard Machine. 
 
 The first work to be done in making an original design, or in reproducing a 
 design by making an analysis of a woven fabric, is to prepare the "sketch." This 
 sketch may be arranged the exact size of pattern needed, or it may be proportionally 
 larger or smaller. If the design is a reproduction from a woven fabric, a correct 
 duplicate on the regular drawing paper is required ; for this sketch is of the same 
 value to the designer for Jacquard work as the correct picking out of a weave is to 
 the designer for harness loom-work. 
 
 In preparing an original sketch, the points to be considered are : The setting 
 of the figure, and the most practical size. 
 
 Methods of Setting the Figures. 
 
 To give a clear illustration of this, Figs. 69, 70, 71, 72, j$, 74, 75, and 76 are 
 designed, representing a few of the methods most frequently used. A separate 
 explanation of each will familiarize the student with this part of the work. 
 
 ir-^zr-jt- 
 
 m 
 
 Fig. 69. Fig. 70. Fig. 71. Fig. 72. 
 
 Fig. 69 illustrates the setting of a figure in "plain." The space allowed for one 
 repeat (outline of the square) is shown divided horizontally and vertically into two 
 equal parts each way. [See dotted lines a, b, and c, d, thus giving the centre for the 
 square at S.~\ The design contains two circles in its repeat ; one of these circles is 
 shown with its centre at 6*, and the other circle is illustrated divided into four 
 quarters, as shown in the four corners of the square. 
 
 Fig. 70 represents another "plain" setting, but the figure employed, a half- 
 moon with a small circle near it, is set in two directions. 
 
 Fig. 71 illustrates a design having in its repeat two different figures, each set by 
 itself in "plain." A third figure, ring e,f,g, h, is used four times to break the 
 general prominence of the effect. 
 
 Fig. 72 shows the setting of a figure in a design similar to a 
 "four-harness broken twill." 
 
 Fig- 73 shows a combination of one figure set in four-harness 
 broken twill style, the other set in plain. 
 
 Fig. 74 shows the setting of a figure in the "five-leaf satin " 
 style. [See diagram, p. 109.] 
 
 
 1 I I I I I 1 I 
 
 I 13-1 I I '3-' I 
 
 I I !4-l I I 4-' 
 
 |2.l I I 12.' I I 
 
 i-l I I U-l I 
 
 I 
 
 I 13-1 
 
 13-1 
 
 I I 14-1 I I 14-1 ■ 
 
 1. 
 
 |2.| I I '2.1 I 1 
 I I 
 
 N 
 
 II I I I I I I 
 Diagram for Fig. 72 
 
109 
 
 Fig. 75 shows the setting of two figures in the " six-leaf satin" style. 
 
 Fig. 76 illustrates the setting of one figure in the " cigJit-leaf satin" method. 
 
 --k---"- ; « I V- 
 
 
 
 8 j 
 
 Mi 
 
 Fig. 73. Fig. 74. Fig. 75. Fig. 76. 
 
 In setting figures in a sketch the appearance of " streaks" must be avoided. 
 To do this it will be found advantageous to sketch more than one repeat of the 
 pattern ; if possible, sketch two each way, that the streaking, if any, may show itself 
 
 I I II I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 
 
 
 ! ! 1 1 I 1 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 
 1 1 14-1 1 1 1 14-1 
 
 
 !«-! MM* 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 15-1 
 
 1 15-1 
 
 1 1 13-1 1 1 1 13-1 
 
 U-l 1 1 1 li.l 1 1 1 1 
 
 1 1 1 14-1 1 1 1 14-1 1 
 
 ! |2-l I 1 1 |2.| 1 | 1 
 
 Mil 15.1 l 1 1 I5.1 
 
 1 ! 13-1 1 1 1 13.1 1 1 
 
 
 i.l i 1 1 u-l II M 
 
 1 1 1 1 I6.1 | 1 
 
 MM I6.1 1 1 
 
 1 1 13-1 Mill 
 
 1 13-1 1 M M 
 
 1 1 1 1 1 ! 1 18.1 
 
 1 II II 1 8.1 
 
 1 II 1 15-1 1 1 1 
 
 1 1 1 15-1 1 i ' 
 
 | '2.| | 1 1 1 1 1 
 
 12.1 MIM 1 
 
 1 II II 1 17-1 1 
 
 1 II II 17-1 1 
 
 1 ! 1 14-1 1 1 1 1 
 
 1 1 14.1 MM 
 
 li.l i II II I ll-l I II I I I 
 
 Mill 6. 
 
 I I 13-1 I 
 
 I MM 
 
 l j 
 
 I '5-1 
 
 I I I I I 
 
 6.1 
 
 13-1 MM. 
 
 |8.| M II I lit 
 
 I |2.i MM 
 
 II I II I 7. 
 
 I I M I I M I I I 
 
 Diagram for Fig. 74. 
 
 I I I 14-1 I I 
 
 i.| I II II 
 
 I I I '5-1 I I ' 
 
 I I2M II M 
 
 II II II '7-1 
 
 I I I4.| I I M 
 
 li.l II M M 
 
 TTTI Mill Mill I I I 
 
 Diagram for Fig. 76. 
 
 in the sketch, and be corrected there. Nearly all the patterns seen in fabrics which 
 
 show streaks can be traced to designers who prepare their designs without sketches ; 
 
 for if a sketch had been made, the streaking of the fabric 
 
 might have been foreseen had the designer exercised 
 
 proper care in the examination and perfecting of his 
 
 sketch. Figures taken from plants, or from life, can be 
 
 set in the same manner as explained for Figs. 69 to 76. 
 
 For example, Fig. y/, the figure for design. Fig. XXXIV., 
 
 p. 32, the latter being set after the method illustrated by 
 
 Fig. 70. 
 
 Figs. XXV., XXVI., XXXIII., XXXVIII., XLL, 
 XLIV, XLV., XLVIL, XLVIII., LI., LV., LVIL, LXL, 
 etc, all show sketches for fabrics executed on one or 
 the other methods of construction just explained. 
 
 Fig. 77. 
 Size of Sketch Required. 
 
 This is regulated by the number of harness-cords in one repeat or division, the 
 method of tie-up employed, and the texture of the finished fabric. For example : 
 
110 
 
 Take 400 harness-cords for one division. Texture of the fabric when finished ICO /9o. 
 Tie-up employed, straight-through. Required: The size of one repeat for the sketch. 
 Answer: 400 -f- 100 = 4 inches. The figures may be arranged in this sketch to 
 repeat one, two, three, four, or more times in the 4 inches thus available. 
 
 Enlarging and Reducing Figures for Sketches. 
 
 Fig. 79. 
 
 Fig. 78. 
 
 Figures are not always enlarged or reduced by free-hand drawing. Some 
 designers always use the " squaring off" process. The latter is clearly illustrated 
 by Figs. 78 and 79. Fig. 79 shows the reduction of Fig. 78, and Fig. 78 the enlarge- 
 ment of Fig. 79. 
 
 Fig. 80. 
 
 Fig. 81. 
 
Ill 
 
 The method observed is of different size squares for each design. Each square 
 of Fig. 78 containing the same proportion of the whole design as is shown by the 
 corresponding squares of Fig. 79. 
 
 Fig. 82. 
 
 Fig. 80 illustrates another method of ruling off a figure preparatory to enlarge- 
 ment, reduction, or duplication. 
 
 45 
 
 Fig 83. 
 
 This "squaring off" is not always done in a sketch for the reasons just men- 
 tioned, it being frequently done to assist the designer i n the original construction 
 
 O 
 
 Fig. 84. 
 
112 
 
 of his figure. Such an application of its utility may be observed in Fig. 81, centre 
 for Damask ; Fig. 82, border for Damask; and Figs. 83 and 84, sketches for Damask 
 table-cover, centre, with side border. The design of a border for a centre, or vice 
 versa, must be selected to correspond (Fig. 85). 
 
 Fig. 85. 
 
 Fig. 86 shows a horizontal and vertical border, both of the same design. It is 
 obvious that it would be a very imperfect design if either border should be allowed 
 to form the corner, hence a union must be carefully constructed embodying the same 
 
 general features as the design. 
 
 Fig. S6. 
 Transferring of the Sketch to the Squared Designing Paper. 
 
 Having obtained a perfect sketch of the design as it appears in the fabric, or as 
 it is desired to show, the outlines are transferred to the n designing paper. This 
 always requires an enlargement of the design, and to accomplish this the sketch itself 
 must be ruled proportionally to the heavy squares found on the □ designing paper. 
 If these squares should be too small for the sketch, they may be enlarged by throwing 
 4, 9, or 12 of the " squares " into one large one ; which is indicated by extra ruling off 
 with pencil upon the required heavy lines. In this case the sketch is ruled off 
 corresponding to these pencil lines. The transfer of the sketch to the required 
 n desi^nino- paper is governed by rules already explained for the enlargement of a 
 design on the regular drawing paper. After the design is transferred to the a 
 -designing paper it must be " outlined in squares." 
 
113 
 
 Outlining in Squares. 
 
 This consists in painting the small squares forming the outline of the figure as 
 called for by the outline of the drawing. Two methods are observed: One " out- 
 lining in squares" inside the "drawing outline;" the other " outlining in squares" 
 outside the " drawing outline." 
 
 If painting outside the outline, no small squares are taken, in which the drawing 
 outline, taken from inside the figure, encloses more than one-half of their surfaces. 
 If painting the "outline in squares " inside the "drawing outline," this rule is 
 reversed, thus no small square can be taken which is overrun by the drawing 
 outline more than one-half from the outside of the design. The most difficult part 
 of the outlining in squares is to obtain the nearest possible reproduction of the 
 drawing outline. If circles, curves, etc., are to be made, they must be reproduced as 
 nearly correct as possible ; no bunches, cuts, etc., should disturb its symmetry. 
 
 Fig. 87. 
 
 Fig. 87 shows the variations and methods to be resorted to in "outlining by 
 squares" the five circles, each of different size. 
 
 Fig. 88 shows the formation of projected straight lines varying from a horizontal 
 to a vertical direction. The full changes by 8 s , 7 s , 6 s , 5 s , 4 s , 3 s , 2 s , I s are 
 shown in full black. The half changes between the 2 s and 3 s are formed of 2 s and 
 3 s taken alternately as shown by the shaded line. Another half change between 1 s 
 and 2 s , also represented by the shaded effect, shows the change to be a repetition of 
 the step 1, 1, 2. Between this last mentioned change and the regular 2 s change, 
 we find the direction of a straight line as derived from a repetition of 2, 2, 1, indicated 
 
114 
 
 by the • Below the regular change by i s the straight line is formed by using 7 
 times 1 and once 2 repeated. Above the regular change by 1 s as shown by the 
 black diagonal, these same changes will form straight lines running from 45 to 90 . 
 
 Fig. 88. 
 Rules for " Outlining in Squares" Inside or Outside the Drawing Outline. 
 
 The outlining in squares outside the drawing outline is observed in designs 
 havino- the figure produced by the filling. The outlining in squares inside the 
 drawing outline is observed in designs having the figure produced by the warp. 
 By reversing these two rules, the figure in the design would be changed from the 
 sketch, for if outlining in squares inside the drawing outline, using filling for figure, 
 the figure would be reduced proportionally to the reduction made or taken away by 
 the outline squares. Thus, also, if the warp formed the figure, and the "outlining 
 
115 
 
 being done in squares," outside the drawing outline, the figure would increase 
 proportionally the size of the squared outline. These rules refer to painting the 
 squares for warp only. Some fabrics require also the painting of the filling 
 squares. 
 
 The foregoing explanation may be reduced to the following Rule: If the 
 figure is required to be in white, " outline by squares " outside the drawing outline ; 
 if the figure is required to be painted, "outline by squares" inside the drawing 
 outline. 
 
 After the design is outlined by full small squares, either the figure or the ground 
 (as required, but generally the figure) is painted all over. The paint required for 
 this work has been previously described. It is only necessary to mention that it must 
 have body enough to be clearly visible, but not sufficient to obscure the black ruled 
 lines of the paper, which must show clearly through the paint. The weave, if 
 necessary, is next put on the required spots, either in white or black paint. 
 
 t x . % t Sjfc u 9 10 
 
 Illustration of a Sketch. 
 
 Outlining on u paper — -finished design and 
 fabric sample. For single-cloth fabrics, as dam- 
 asks, dressgoods, etc. 
 
 To give a clear illustration of the entire pro- 
 cess from sketch to finished design, Figs. 89, 90, 
 and 91 are designed. Fig. 92 showing the effect 
 of the design on the fabric after being woven. 
 
 Fig. 89 represents a sketch for a fabric sup- 
 posed to be executed with 80 warp-threads in one 
 repeat ; thus, if using 8 by 8 n designing paper, fig. 89. 
 
 (texture in this example supposed to be equal in filling and warp), the sketch must 
 be divided and ruled off into eight parts each way. 
 
 Fig. 90. 
 
 Fig. 91. 
 
116 
 
 Fig. 90 illustrates the sketch transferred to the □ designing paper. Fig. A 
 represents the "drawing in outline." Fig. B, the "outlining in squares." Fig. 91, 
 the complete design ; and Fig. 92, the fabric sample. 
 
 1 % % % 
 
 Of i 
 
 ■"%>'*■■'■% 
 
 % % % 
 
 m a 
 
 Fig. 92. 
 
 m 
 
 u 
 
 JQ 
 30 
 
 Ml 
 
 innnnbnnnnnnBHnnnnnndntianBnnQr 
 nl 11 11 11 ii llilji irr'nprjDntgjiji « nuDnrjtiE 
 
 juuuuuuuuuuuuyyi 
 
 Bni 
 
 nnnnnnnnnnnni 
 
 Design lor Damask Fabrics to be Executed on a Jacquard Loom, with Compound 
 
 Harness Attached. 
 
 These designs require no special weave, as 
 that is taken care of by the compound harness in 
 front of the Jacquard harness, as explained in 
 Chapter XII., page 58. After painting in the 
 design, it is finished, ready for card-stamping. 
 Fig. 93 shows us a leaf, taken from sketch (Fig. 
 80), which may be used in connection with a 
 larger design, but will clearly illustrate this divi- 
 sion of textile work. 
 
 .flnnnngDBWLJ. i^nnnaMancnnn: 
 TnnnnBBMMBBMBancciMMrXJnnnnnn 
 nnMBBBBBBBBBBBBBnSBBnnSunnnQr 
 
 CBBBBBBBB:_:^::BBBBz:BBB::::BBBB«agn 
 
 BBBBB BBB . BBBB BBBBBBBBUC 
 
 _;:_BBBBBBBBBBBj^BZIuBjGCnBBBBBB«Ba 
 "I. BBBBBBBBB K BBLj !■■■■■ BBBBBB 
 BflflBBBBBBBBB \ ■■■■■■■■ «»■« 
 
 ICUnBBaaBBBBBBBuBZBBBBBBBB^BBBnt 
 annannUBBBBBBB3CBBrJBBBBBBB 'BBB c 
 
 nnnnCBBBBJDBnBBB-BBBBBBBBBBBUn 
 
 mannnBBBBaBBnnBBBBCBBBBBBBBBBB;'- 
 
 xcxi:ni:..iii::«LJHinm •■»■« 
 
 annnnnBBBBBBB^BCBBBBBBBaaCuBBB.Jtj 
 
 xinnguBBBBBB^BBB-jBBBBBjnnnaDannE 
 HannnmiiijiHiiiMjjnancunnr 
 
 nnaUBBBBBaBBBBBBBB' ' 
 
 i 
 
 
 3nBBBBBuBBBBBBBjnnnnnnBnnn~ 
 
 ■ ■■■■ 
 
 UaannaBBBB 
 
 3nnnnn«MBBi ._ 
 
 3nnnnnBBBBBBBnnnnnnnnnnn.' 
 
 TunannBBBBBBBULJn^rnqnnnnnn' 
 aannnnBBBBBBnnnnnnSnnnunr.r! 
 "nSnnniJBBBBBnBnnniSnnn" - ^ 
 
 nnnn 
 
 H3DMMgHBBBBEng 
 
 . onnnnBBBanncn^annnnLanL- 
 npnnnnn jB nnnnnn-'Trlnnnnnrff 
 
 annnnnnana 
 
 nnnnnnnnnBnEE 
 
 Fig. 93. 
 
 Designs for Two-ply Ingrain Carpet. 
 
 In these fabrics, when the ground and figure 
 are indicated in the design, the same is considered 
 
1L 
 
 117 
 
 as finished. As previously stated in the article devoted to these fabrics, a two-ply 
 ingrain carpet is composed of two fabrics, in which the journals introduce the weave, 
 and die double-acting Jacquard machine the exchange of ground and figure effect. 
 
 in. Fig. 94 represents a small portion of a design illus- 
 
 trating the three principal effects of this operation. 
 I. = figure up. 
 II. = ground up. 
 
 III. = effect technically known as "shot-about," 
 derived from one pick, figure up ; one pick, ground 
 up ; and repeated. 
 
 In Fig. 95 a detailed description or analysis of the 
 Fw. 94. interlacing warp and filling of Fig. 94 is given. 
 
 iKSw^ 
 
 ■»■■« 
 
 !E"LLLL!DL 
 
 ^CIT.BBBBBMBl 
 
 eagcor xirjfErjr. 
 
 _ ~uqpntp5pBcinr 
 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ggxDXBpSnBnnr ~~ " 
 ■■■■■fanmamnaannnr 
 
 ■■■■■■■i8fa.:qfO!annc: :r. 
 
 KB»a««««Bw^23li±nnfcSi5n 
 — ■■■■ ■■ nnTn i i i rfTph nnnq 
 
 ■ = figure up. ) Produced by the 
 ^ = ground up. J Jacquard machine 
 X = weave for ground. j Produced by 
 . = weave for figure. J journals. 
 
 The two-ply ingrain carpet can also be made upon a Jacquard loom, tied up for 
 double sections. [See Chapter VI., page 48.] This is also extensively used in the 
 manufacture of upholstery fabrics ; in fact, the latter mentioned method is almost 
 exclusively used in Europe. 
 
 In Fig. 95 the weave of the " shot-about " effect calls for two picks face, and two 
 picks back. An examination of this part of the draft shows that the warp-thread 
 represented by the light pick — — is to be raised, or has been raised in the 
 adjoining heavy pick 3 t ; further, we find the two light picks separated by the 
 raising of a different warp-thread in each pick, which is also effected between the two 
 heavy picks by the lowering of another warp-thread. This places the ground-thread 
 below its corresponding figure or mate thread, or the figure thread below its 
 corresponding ground-thread. 
 
 If these mate threads introduced in succession are required to show side by 
 side, either on the face or the back of the fabric, these changes must be indicated 
 on the design by different colors. If such effects are to be introduced when using 
 the common ingrain Jacquard machine, the needles of the latter must be operated 
 at each pick ; this requires twice as many cards as are used in designs where the 
 mate thread is always placed below or above its corresponding thread. 
 
 Designs for Dressgoods Figured with Extra Warp (one end Ground, one end Figure), 
 and Executed on the Double Section Tie-up. 
 
 In the article explaining the double section tie-up, [see Chapter VI., p. 48], as 
 well as the one on the selection of the proper squared paper required for these 
 fabrics, the general character of these fabrics has been explained. 
 
118 
 
 As mentioned in Chapter VI., the machine is divided in two parts, figure and 
 ground ; the Jacquard harness is leased one end figure, one end ground, and 
 repeated. 
 
 ■ naaa ■■■■■■■■ 
 
 ■■■■ ■■■■■■ 
 ■■■ ■■■■ ■■■ 
 
 ■■■B ■■■■■ 
 
 ■■■■■■ ■ 
 
 :■■!!■-■■: 
 
 ■ ■«■■■ - 
 
 ■ ■£■■ 
 ■ B ■ ~ 
 
 ■ 
 ■■■ : 
 
 ■■ ■■■■■■■■ 
 
 ■■■ ■■■ 
 
 ■ Diiiai ■■■■■ 
 
 Fig. 96. 
 
 xnxn 
 
 nxnx 
 
 xnxn 
 nitB 
 
 X"X- 
 
 nxQX 
 foxn 
 nxnx 
 xnxn 
 nxnx 
 xnxn 
 
 -x 
 zx~ 
 - zx 
 
 XQ 
 
 oxnx 
 
 Fig. 97. 
 
 nxnx 
 xnxn. 
 nxnx 
 xn 
 
 Fig. 98. 
 
 Fig. 96 illustrates a part of such a design, and is to be cut for the figure part of 
 the needles. 
 
 Fig. 97 shows the plain weave, which is cut without a design in that portion of 
 the card which operates the ground of the Jacquard harness. 
 
 Fig. 98 shows the analysis of the woven fabric for the design referred to in 
 
 Fig. 96. 
 
 [N. B. — The plain weave used for explaining the present example may be 
 substituted by other weaves, as a - i — r twill, -^-j- twill, or the four harness broken 
 twill, etc., without changing the figure design.] 
 
 Designs for Figured Pile Fabrics. 
 
 Fig. 99. — Shading of Flowers in Sketches for Damask Fabrics. 
 
 Designs for figured pile fabrics 
 (terry or velvet), Plushes, Astrakhans, 
 etc., are also executed without intro- 
 ducing a weave in the design. The 
 design is only intended for the pile- 
 threads, which are raised when intro- 
 ducing the wire ; the front harness 
 operating the ground-warp. The pile- 
 ■^warp, when raised over the wire, is 
 bound by means of the previous pick, 
 as well as by the pick following by the 
 filling: to the ground cloth. 
 
 The Shading of Textile Fabrics by the 
 Weave. 
 
 This is generally done in the 
 " figure " part (especially in flowers, 
 leaves, etc.), of damasks and similar 
 textile fabrics. The shading can be 
 applied to the satin weaves to the 
 best advantage. 
 
119 
 
 Rule for S/iadiug with Satin Weaves. 
 
 Put the ground weave (filling for face) over the 
 entire part of the □ designing paper, which is required 
 to be shaded ; afterwards add one, two, three or more 
 horizontal or vertical (connecting) spots to the one spot 
 which forms the foundation or satin filling for face. The 
 heaviness of the shade is regulated by the sketch or 
 the fabric. For example : In an 8-leaf satin the differ- 
 ence between filling for face and warp for face may be 
 made with three or four changes only ; or with the entire 
 seven changes. 
 
 For shading twill weaves no rule can be given. 
 
 Fig. ioo shows the shading of the 5-leaf satin, four changes, each eight threads, 
 giving 4 x 8, or 32 threads for the effect. 
 
 : i^iii eidi ■■■■ 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 ■ BBBB BBBB BBBB 
 ■BB BBBB BBBB BB 
 
 ■ III ■■ I 1 
 
 IB BBBB BBBB BBB 
 ■BBB BBBB BBBB ■ 
 
 ■ B ■■ ■ BB ■ BB 
 BB B BB ■ BB B 1 
 
 ■■:■■■ iiiil 
 
 ■ BB B BB B ■■ ■ 
 
 3 
 
 i- 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 ::b hi a bb b bb: : 
 
 B BBBB B B 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 B Bl B B B 
 B B 1 B B . B B 
 
 B . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 a ' a : m .: 
 
 .■ 
 
 4 
 
 a b b 
 
 — zB-zzzM~r~B 
 m — -~.M"~-rnr~ 
 
 a ; 
 I 
 
 B 
 
 J MUU Bt 
 
 :■'"■::■: 
 mzbzzb: 
 
 aana: 
 
 zzmzjzmzzimzb mzb-j; M i ib 
 
 .._ZBZZBZZBZBBZIBZZMZBBZB: . 
 
 TTnT- ZZBZZMZZBZBMZBZZBZBBZBBZBZMBZI 
 
 zaazzciz'tzziBzzBrrBBZBzrBZBBZBBZBZMBZBzir 
 
 nzcBZZMZZBZMZzazzBnBBZBMZBZBazBBnMZM 
 
 ;bzzzzc;zzbzzbzzbzbbzbbzbzbbzbbzbzmm — 
 
 _ tzzzz* 
 zzmzz :: :: :■: ~zi 
 zbzzmzb. :: afchcnMuDi i 1 11 iUUJB 
 ZMZBraMZiizzBZZzz. .izi^m 
 bb. :iii:b.:i::::c: " b :^-J 
 e :: :ezb :: :■: izzzh . . . : : zm. .zl 
 ■zbezbzzbzbzz: EbBpED! 
 
 IUUUUU 
 
 ^^BJjnBnaBEIBBCBBgBZBB3BB"B«BBaBBnBBBBI Mi II IB! IBqjBjnrjJjBuiuiJwr: 
 
 p^tzzzngMnzMzzMZMBi :■■: ■■■■zMrcBBHBZMHZMZBBZMZz'azB^iizci^ipznnLSJ 
 
 BgZZZZBZZBZZBZBBZBBZBBBBZBBZBBBB-BBZBBBBZBBZBZBB-B^^^B-. 
 
 EBzBZZBZZBZBBZBZZBZBMZBBZBrmBBBBZBBBBBBBZHZBB-BZZBZMUZJIZt 
 *ZZZZZZZB::ZBZZH.MBZMBZBBBBZBBT:EBBBBBBZMBBBZB_l-B = BBZ1BZZZZ] 
 
 Bzzzzbzzb: :: ■ ■■ bb bbhb mbzbbbbbbbzbbbbzbbzbzbbzhz. BQmlP 
 Bzbzzzzzbzbbzbzzb be bb ■■■■■■a ■■■■■■■ mi 11 a a « 
 
 fczZZZZBZZBZZBZBBZBBZBBBBBBB/BBBBBBBZBBBBZBBZBZBB-lS^_ZB._£a 
 fcpZZMZZBZZBZBBZBBZBBBBZBBZBBBBBBB. BBBB BB fl BBl B H ZB : B ,B. 
 
 BM ZZZZ ZnZBBZBZZB II BB BBBBBBBZBBBBHBBZBBBB-BBZB_EB_Bnnn=B_.n ZCn 
 nCZZZZ:BZZBZZBZBBZBBZBBBBBBBZBBBBBBBZBBBBZBBZBZBS3_* = .-.BZB^ ^C_1C 
 [ZZZBZZHZZBZBBZBB Z*\ BB 1 BB BBBBBBBZBBBBBBBZBBBaZQ = ZB = B ==i Br l ; LO i= ,. : Z 
 ■zfcZZZZBZZBZZBZBBZBBZBHBBBBB 3BBBHBB BBBB BB ■ = BP^g^l-LJ5i r^ nn D 
 nZZCZBZZBZZBZBBZ:BBZBBBBZBBZIIBBBBBBZBBBBZBB. J B = aB = a^._.B„B fc ZJ ; .Zrn F BZn 
 B - . B B BB B El BB BBBBBaBZBBBBBBBZBBBBZBBZajBZwEQzrjL^nZt 
 mZCZZZ^ZZBZZBZBBZBaZBBBBZBaZnaBBBB»rBBBBZBB-HZBa = BZZ-ZB r ,L ;? iZ^.^ I JI 
 nZZZBZZBZZBZBBZBBZMZBMZHBZBBIiBBBB BBBBZBEZBZBBZH . □. ■ ..-,* . rCB^pn 
 IZBZZZZZZZBZZBBZBZBBZMBZBBBBZBUZEBBB BB B BBZ5 = H-EBZiL-ZZZHSpSZCn 
 IZeznZZBZZ»Z:ZBZBBZBBZBBBB:::BBZHaBBZBB_BBBBZBn_B = aB c H^._B^^._ : £!rZ i:5 BZl 
 
 a ■■■; bb bb a » n iiiizh bbbbzbb: mowBIuI .a_H = ZTa ;= 
 
 — ZBZZKi MBZBBZBZBB MBZBBBBZBBZBZBBZBZ_HZH_. w S= 
 
 zmzbbzbzzbzbbzbb~hbbbzbb_:ezbbzbbzbz 
 
 bzzk_:~b-:bhzbbrbzhbzbbzbzbbzbbz«r 
 
 ■zzmzbb ibbzbzbbzebzb mus.iv'iir.- 
 
 — a — i-t in -B-BB-BB--BZBB. ■■■■"■::■■-■■ .r^ — ■z^_pzczB..zz 
 
 zzbzzbzbb-bzzbzbb bbzb bbzbzzb bb ez:_bzb __zt:B ^, _ 
 
 ZZZZBZZB ZZBZBBZBBZBZBBZBZZBZBB .K . M_B_J--- r JBZ t r .. ._ -.— B- 
 
 izBziZBiiHzzazzzzBi^Enzzng 
 
 IZBZBBZBZnBZBZZZqCcnBZS 
 
 :BBZBZZBZHananzzzBr:zzg3 
 -bzzbzh: :: :azz:z mzzzzzzzm 
 
 nnzz 
 
 . jg nrrni 
 
 — ;— —_;_i. ,i ,~ — — ^^—- — — 
 
 zcczzozazzzgn: : 
 
 lUZBBZBZZMZBBZMBZBZBBCB :aza: 
 ■nC r ZBZZMZBZZBZBBZBZnBrMBZM: 
 
 jBHzazzazBzziBzizazn^. 
 
 imzemzzmzmzzm: 
 ian |i !■: inr 
 
 ^zzazzarzaznazn 
 -m, n ii il .1 unBznmzSSg: 
 
 ZZMZ ~ZZ 
 
 Z BZZZZBZZIZlZTZZI 
 
 ::bzb :: : :: .;:: a::rz:: 
 B3zzannnHza xirx£a.~ 
 B ' ..ii l U Z aj n nnnnnBBf-i" 
 : n ib ; ; i i i i ' i! ii i i mi 
 
 Fig. ioi. — 8-I.eaf Satin. 
 
 Fig. ioi illustrates the 8-leaf satin applied for shading a circle, using in 
 rotation every possible change. 
 
120 
 
 ■ -^r:Bnnnnrnnnr*nn 
 
 ■ innnancnna 
 
 ■ n 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 a 3 D ■ 
 
 ■ D ■ a 
 
 ■ ■ :bl:ci 
 
 ■ ■ ■ ■ 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 ■ - ■ 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 ■ ■ : 
 
 ■ ' ■■ 
 nnM :: ■ 
 
 ■ ■ : ■ 
 
 ■ OB I 
 
 ■ B 
 
 ■ ■' 
 
 jxjkxi 
 ■ 
 
 ■ D 
 
 ■ ■ : 
 i ■ ■ : 
 i a ■■ 
 
 i ■■ ■ 
 ■ ■ ■ . ■ 
 
 a aa a 
 
 ■ □ ■■ 
 
 bo i: ■ 
 
 '■■' ■■' 
 _ ■■. "a .1 
 Hon " ■■: ■■' ■■ it 
 £;■■□□■■ II ■■ : ■■. 
 bi an ■■ H «1 
 ■ oa ■■■ ■■ ii ■■■!: 
 a in aa ■■: :i»Dlini 
 aa oa aa ■■■ bb. .■■□■ 
 bb bb ids aa: ■■ ma 
 
 BEDBBB BB GflflflUB BB 
 BBB BB BBBBBB BB ■■■ 
 BB ■Bill! BB BBBBBB 
 BBBBBB BB BBBBBB BB 
 BBBB BB BBBBBB BB BB 
 BBB BBBBBB BB BBflflfl 
 B BBBBBB BB 9GBBBB fl 
 
 chbbbbb bbbbbb bbb 
 
 ■■:■■"■■■■■■: bb::bbb» 
 bb bbbbbb. bb. bbbbbb : 
 bb 'bbb:' bb::bb:-;bbb. :bb;j 
 bbb ei bbb bbb bb sb 
 
 IBB BB BBB ■■ BB_flflfl 
 
 bb bbb bb bb bbb bb 
 :"bdb bb bb bbb .bb bb 
 b:bb bb bib eb id bb 
 
 B- BB: BB BB BB BB fl 
 
 b: Aa bb ■■ bb bbi:b 
 
 B BB BIBB EB SB B 
 bb bb ■■' ■; ■■ HMIla 
 
 BB BR BO BB BB BB.i 
 
 bb bb db bb ii bb bb::: 
 : d bb bb . b ob bb 
 ibb ib b bb. bb b.j 
 
 bb: bb: 
 
 b :_::::•: ■ : :: ■ : 
 
 fl D 
 
 Bu~nzi~^~ b 
 ■ ■:.::: b':: fl" 
 
 B ' 
 
 □ 
 
 :bb: bb 
 nmani 
 
 ii b. ■ 
 
 3UBBLJ 
 
 b. , men 
 
 ■ ;b :□ 
 i bb : 
 
 IB ■ [ 
 
 .■' : ■' : 
 
 IB B' 1 
 fl B 
 
 :. b_: ■ 
 
 b: _■ 
 ■ 
 
 . 
 
 B 
 3 B 
 a 
 
 II B : 
 
 fl' : b i 
 
 ■ : : 
 
 fntEM! jranpn 
 
 ; uBuu a jcnngmnnnn 
 innnnnnnnMnnnnnnnnn 
 
 Fig. 102 illustrates the shading of the io-leaf satin from 
 filling for face (— — ), to warp for face (— — ), and back again 
 to filling for face. 
 
 . BBBBflflfl BBBBBBB 
 ■ BBBBBBB BBBBBB 
 
 Bfl IBBBBIfl BflflBB 
 BBB BBBB 
 
 ■BBB BBBBBBB flflB 
 
 _ ■■BBflflfl B 
 ■BBBBBB BBBflBBB 
 
 SflflflBB B flflflBfl: ■ 
 BBBBB n mill 
 SB BBflflfl B BBBBfl 
 fl BflflBB ■ flflflfl 
 
 ■■: :■: ■■■■■: .■:::■■■ 
 
 ■■■ ■ ■■■■■ ■_.■■ 
 
 BBBB B BflflBB ■: ■ 
 BBflflfl fl BflflBB fl.J 
 
 )! .flflBB fl; . ■■■■ 'fl 
 
 nBHL:BBBBLiBri'.BBBfl 
 
 ■nam .BBBB' ■ bbb 
 
 Bfl' 'fl. . BBBB fl Bfl 
 BB' "B: ;LBBBB::BCnB 
 
 ■bbb: b :. flflflfl: ■::: : 
 ■ □aa a .: bbbb n 
 
 " .BBB' .. B. . BBB ■ 
 
 B : ABB ■ Bflfl 
 
 ■ a qab B ■■■ ] 
 : ■' ' ■■■. . ■ .'flflfl 
 a a: Bflfl ■ ' ■■ 
 bb' . a: :. ■■■ ■ ■ 
 ■aa. ' a. :: BBB a 
 
 : Bflfl b : Bflfl a : 
 ■ B ■ Q« : ■ 
 
 ■ ■■: : ■ _: bb: 
 
 IB. BB ■ Bfl ! 
 
 BB fl Dfl 
 
 ■' b :: ■■: :: n ■ 
 
 ■B B BB B 
 
 : an :: a 
 
 ua . .. 
 
 a:.:: 
 b " ' o : 
 □ ■' : ". ■ a : 
 
 c: a. :: . .a : . a: . :: a' ; 
 n" a : :; .■: .. v ■ a 
 a ■' ' : fl fl 
 : b ■ . :. .a :: a' □ 
 □£■: :: .' ■. ■ :nn»n 
 nnnnnnnBBnnGangi 
 ■nnnnnnnBcinnrnnn 
 nMnnannnaannccnQ 
 BnBnnnonnL.HnnnnB 
 fflnan: b 
 
 ■ "..■'. ,:.i 
 
 ■ . ::.■:! 
 
 BnnnnnBnunnnnnBn 
 
 Rg. 103. 
 8-Harness Twill. 
 
 ■■: 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 1. 2.— io-Leaf Satin. 
 
 103 represents the (-? — ) eight harness twill, 
 shaded from the filling for face to the warp for face effect ; 
 the change occurring every eight picks. 
 
Glossary and Index, 
 
 Technical words, names and terms given in the Index, with reference to the number of the page where explained, are 
 a complete collection used in the work. 
 
 The Glossary, connected with the Index, contains those terms (mostly technical words) which to some extent have been 
 mentioned in the book, or terms which, in the course of study, will appear alone. They are treated in a short but thorough and 
 comprehensive manner in this Glossary. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 American Index, Piano Card-stamping machines for, ...... 86 
 
 Analysis, the art of resolving a machine, fabric, or substance of any kind, into its constituent parts. 
 Arrangement of hooks, needles, griffe-bars, springs, spring-frame and needle-board in the single- 
 lift Jacquard machine, ......... 14 
 
 Backing, the filling of the lower fabric in a double cloth. 
 
 Batten, the frame which carries the cylinder in its motion to and from the needle-board, . 15 
 
 Batten Motion, .......... 15 
 
 Binder-warp, the warp-threads producing the foundation of a fabric; interior warp; this warp is 
 generally not visible in the finished fabric. Used in astrakhans, velvets, plushes, Brussels car- 
 pets, upholstery fabrics, etc. 
 Bobbin. The filling is wound on the bobbin, and the latter placed in the shuttle. 
 Bonchon, M., the inventor of the principle of the Jacquard machine, .... 7 
 
 Border, the outer part of a fabric. 
 
 Brush, as required for perfect work, ........ 107 
 
 Camel Hair is the hair of certain camels, and is used either combed or carded. 
 
 Card-guide, used in the Piano Card-stamping machine, . . . . . .90 
 
 Card-rack, ........... 19 
 
 Card-wire, ........... 19 
 
 Carriage, technical name for a part of the Piano Card-stamping machine, ... 88 
 
 Technical name for a part of the Repeating machine, .... 93, 96 
 
 Cashmere, or Kashinere wool, is the fine hair of the Cashmere goat, which thrives upon the 
 Himalaya mountains and surrounding country, in Asia. Cashmere is also used to indicate 
 certain fabrics made of wool or silk warp and goat hair, or fine merino wool filling. 
 Catch, a part of the Carriage in the Piano machine, . . . . . .88 
 
 Catches, a part of the Jacquard machine, ....... 13 
 
 Centre Tie-up or Point Tie-up, ........ 33 
 
 Colors used for painting textile designs, ....... 107 
 
 Comber-board, (Cumber-board and Compart-board are also technical terms frequently used for 
 it) ; a perforated board which guides and keeps the harness-cords in the required positions. 
 Lately, wires crossing each other and adjusted in a frame are used with advantage ; this latter 
 style is patented by The G. W. Stafford Manufacturing Co., Providence, R. I. . 20, 130 
 
 Made in strips and adjusted in a frame, . . . . . . .21 
 
 Made of a solid piece of material, ....... 20 
 
 Combination Tie-up in two sections, ........ 56 
 
 121 
 
122 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Compound Harness. Designs for fabrics executed on a Jacquard loom with Compound Harness 
 
 attached, . . . . . . . . . . .116 
 
 General arrangement and application, ....... 58 
 
 Number to use of, ......... 63 
 
 Positions during weaving. ........ 63 
 
 Their operation by a separate machine, ....... 62 
 
 Weaves for working, ......... 63 
 
 Cotton is the white, downy, fibrous substance which envelopes the seeds of various species of the 
 cotton plant, gossypium, belonging to the natural order malvacea. 
 
 The size of the yarn when spun is calculated by numbers, commencing with No. 1, which 
 
 requires 840 yards to 16 ounces; every successive number requiring 840 yards additional for 
 the original 16 ounces. 
 
 Cow Hair, mixed with a suitable fibre like wool, is spun into the filling for coarse ingrain carpets, 
 
 and similar coarse fabrics, as backing-filling for cloakings, etc. 
 Cylinder, a part of the Jacquard machine, . . . . . . . 7, 9, 16 
 
 Damask, a fabric originally made at Damascus, and composed of rich silk. The name is at 
 
 present applied to various textile fabrics composed of cotton, linen, etc., which are of common 
 
 household use, as table-covers, towels, etc. 
 Designing Paper for the different textile fabrics, ...... 103 
 
 Divisions of a comber-board, ........ 22 
 
 Dobbies, Index machines, Witches, etc., are small Jacquard machines, or machines constructed 
 
 upon its principles. 
 Dobby Card-punching Machine, ....... 86 
 
 Double Cloth, selection of designing paper for, ...... 106 
 
 Two separate fabrics fastened together in the process of weaving. The advantages of 
 
 double cloth are various, amongst which we find: To produce a heavier and thicker cloth ; 
 
 using materials to their best advantage ; producing effects impossible to be procured in single 
 
 cloth, etc. There are three divisions of double cloth :— 
 
 a, using one system of warp and two systems of filling ; 
 i, using two systems of warp and one system of filling ; 
 c, using two systems of warp and two systems of filling. 
 Double-lift Double-cylinder Jacquard Machine, principle of construction, advantages over 
 
 the single-lift, and method of operation, ....... 69 
 
 Double-lift Single-cylinder Jacquard Machine, principle of construction, advantages over 
 
 the single-lift, and method of operation, ....... 67 
 
 Doup, an arrangement used in the manufacture of gauze fabrics which compels certain warp- 
 threads to cross each other, ......... 64-66 
 
 Douping Warp, also known as Whip-thread, and used in connection with the ground-warp or 
 
 standard thread in the construction of gauze fabrics, ..... 64 
 
 Drawing-in Draft, method to be observed in drawing-in a warp in the eyes of the heddle. 
 
 End, the technical word for a thread which is used often in its place. 
 
 Expert in Card-stamping, how to become, ...... 86, 88 
 
 Extra Fine, a two-ply ingrain carpet constructed with 832 threads warp, (36 inch wide fabric), 
 
 exclusive of the selvedge, . . . . . . . . -74 
 
 Extra Super, a two-ply ingrain carpet constructed with 1072 threads in warp, (36 inch wide 
 
 fabric), exclusive of the selvedge, ....... 75 
 
 Extra Warp, designs figured with, . . . . . . . .117 
 
 Fabric, the structure of anything; the manner in which the parts of anything are united by art 
 
 and labor ; workmanship, texture, make, etc. 
 
 Manufactured cloth of any kind or material. 
 
 Fabrics for which the Jacquard machine must be used, ..... 9 
 
 Falcon, M., the inventor of the cylinder and the Jacquard cards, .... 7 
 

 . 
 
 
 ii 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 86 
 
 
 
 
 64 
 
 • 
 
 . 
 
 6 4 
 
 -66 
 64 
 
 7. 
 
 9. 
 
 IO, 
 
 13 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 9, 
 
 10 
 23 
 
 16 
 
 9 
 
 105 
 
 23 
 
 62 
 
 
 
 9. 
 
 22 
 
 
 9- 
 
 IO, 
 
 13 
 
 123 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Feed Cylinder, a part of the Repeating machine, ...... 96 
 
 Filling, the threads running crosswise in a cloth. 
 
 Flax. This term is used to designate the flax or linen fibre, and also the plant from which it is 
 obtained. 
 
 Frame, a part of the Jacquard machine, ...... 
 
 French Index, Piano Card-stamping machines for, .... 
 
 Gauze Fabrics, their peculiar characteristic construction, .... 
 
 Threading of the harness for, ....... 
 
 Tying-up for, ......... 
 
 Griffe, a part of the Jacquard machine ; also called Knife Box, 
 
 Griffe-bars, a part of the Jacquard machine ; also called Knives, 
 
 Guide board, used for regulating the height of the mails by tying-up a Jacquard harness, 
 
 Guiding-rod. See Jacquard Plunger. 
 
 Hammer, a part of the Jacquard machine, ...... 
 
 Harness cords, the cords of each leash, ...... 
 
 Heavy Square, its practical points of use on designing paper, 
 
 Heddle and Harness-cord, combining, ...... 
 
 Heddles, as required for compound harness, ..... 
 For the Jacquard harness, ....... 
 
 Hook, a part of the Jacquard machine, ...... 
 
 Index Machines. See Dobbies. 
 
 Ingrain, as applied to carpets, was originally intended for a fabric where the wool was colored 
 before carding and spinning, but which is not true at present, as the yarn is mostly manufac- 
 tured before coloring. The great variety of colors used in an ingrain carpet at the present 
 time, the constant changing of styles, besides the saving of expense by coloring the yarn after 
 manufacture, are the general reasons for it. Ingrain carpet in our country means the same as 
 Scottish or Kidderminster in Europe. 
 
 Ingrain Carpet, two-ply, construction of the fabric, ...... 72 
 
 Two-ply, designs for, . . . . . . . . . 116 
 
 Two-ply, Jacquard Machine, . . . . . . . .71 
 
 Two-ply, selection of designing paper, ...... 106 
 
 Two-ply, tying-up of its Jacquard harness, ...... 72 
 
 Ingrain Carpet Loom, two-ply, built with a stationary shuttle-raceway and an independent 
 
 comb for beating up the filling, ........ 82 
 
 Two-ply, in which the journals are lifted from above by means of a cam arrangement, . 81 
 
 Two-ply, in which the journals are lifted from below and controlled by either a chain or 
 
 cam motion, . . ■ . . . . . . . 81, 82 
 
 Jacquard Cards, general arrangement and application, . . . • 7. 9. 17. 18 
 
 Preparing of, ......... 85 
 
 Stamping of, ......... 85,91 
 
 Jacquard Designing, practical hints, ....... 103 
 
 Jacquard Harness, general arrangement and application, . . . . .20 
 
 Jacquard, Joseph Marie, life of, . . . . . 7, 8 
 
 Jacquard Loom, a loom furnished with the Jacquard arrangement. 
 
 Jacquard Plunger, a part of the Jacquard machine ; also known as Guiding-rod, . . 12 
 
 Journals, peculiarly constructed harness frames used in the manufacture of two-ply ingrain carpets, 75 
 
 Jute is a native plant of China and the East Indies; its long fibre, which is -of a brown to silver 
 gray color, is used largely in the manufacture of Brussels and tapestry carpets, nigs, etc., for 
 the body — ground structure of the fabric. It is distinguished from flax by being colored 
 yellow under the influence of sulphuric acid and iodine solution. The size of the thread 
 when spun is indicated by the same rule as wool — Cut system — 300 yards to 16 ounces. 
 Keys, as used in the Piano Card-stamping machine, ...... 86 
 
124 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 
 
 93 
 
 . 
 
 95 
 
 . 
 
 96 
 
 . 
 
 97 
 
 . 
 
 97 
 
 . 
 
 98 
 
 . 
 
 100 
 
 . 
 
 100 
 
 ■ . . 
 
 100 
 
 . The cylinder is turned 
 
 
 • • • • 
 
 16 
 
 Keys, as used in the Repeating machine, .... 
 
 Key Wire, used in the Repeating machine, 
 
 Lace-hole Press, ....... 
 
 Lacing of Jacquard cards, . 
 
 Lacing Frame, ....... 
 
 Lacing Machines, using two needles for lacing each series of holes, 
 
 Using one needle and one shuttle for lacing each series of holes, 
 
 Lacing Needles, ...... 
 
 Lacing Twine, the kind to use for machine lacing, 
 
 Lantern, an iron extension put on the cylinder of the Jacquard machine 
 
 by means of the catches working on the lantern, 
 Leaf, a harness ; thus : 3-leaf twill or 3-harness twill, etc. 
 Lease, or leas. 
 Leasing of the Jacquard harness, ........ 23 
 
 Leash, two or more harness-cords combined and adjusted to one neck-cord. For every harness- 
 cord a leash contains there will be found a repeat in the design to correspond, . . 9 
 Lifter-boards, or Trap-boards, used in the Jacquard machine for two-ply ingrain carpet, . 71 
 Lifting of the griffe, ......... 12, 17 
 
 Lingo, a small iron weight for each harness-cord, . . . . . -9. 22, 23 
 
 Loom Pickers are generally made of raw hide ; less frequently of sole leather or wood. The 
 picker stick, which is operated by means of cams or arms on the loom, drives the picker, and 
 the latter the shuttle. 
 Loop-guide, a part of the lacing machine, ....... 99 
 
 Mail, made of metal, forms the centre part of a twine heddle ; in the eye of the mail the 
 
 warp-thread is drawn, ......... 22, 23 
 
 Its position in the loom, ......... 23 
 
 Margin, plain part between border and selvedge, or centre and border in a damask table- 
 cover, etc. 
 Mate Threads, technical name used in two-ply ingrain carpets ; one ground-thread and its 
 
 corresponding figure-thread, ........ 72-S0 
 
 Merino, originally the wool of the Spanish Merino sheep, and known as some of the finest wool. 
 Colonial wools, as Australia, Cape of Good Hope, New Zealand, bear the character of the 
 Merino, derived through introducing and breeding the original stock in those countries. 
 Modifications of the single-lift Jacquard machine, . . . . . .67 
 
 Mohair, the fleece of the Angora goat. It is largely used in the manufacture of light-weight dress 
 goods, which are characterized by their lustre. In pile fabrics, as plushes, velvets, astrakhans, 
 etc., of a plain or figured denomination, mohair is often used for the " pile- warp," whereas the 
 ground or body of the fabric is made of cotton. 
 Neck-cord, the cord combining leash and hook, ..... .9 
 
 Needle, a part of the Jacquard machine, . . . . . . . 9, 10, 14 
 
 Needle-board, a part of the Jacquard machine, ...... 17 
 
 Open Harness, tie-up, ......... 23 
 
 Outlining in Squares, methods and rules for, ...... 113-115 
 
 Pattern-cylinder, a part of the Repeating machine, ..... 94 _ 9& 
 
 Perforated Bottom-board, a part of the Jacquard machine ; through this board the neck-cords 
 
 are passed, combining the hooks to the leash, . . . . . .12 
 
 Petty-point Tie-up, . . . . . . . . 5 1 
 
 Piano Card-stamping Machine, operated by belt power, . . . . .91 
 
 Operated by foot power, ........ 86 
 
 Pick, one filling thread ; one passage of the shuttle through the shed. 
 
 Pile Fabrics can have the pile produced either by the warp or the filling. If the pile has to be 
 produced by the warp, a certain number of warp-threads are raised on certain picks over 
 
125 
 
 PAGE 
 
 wires. These elevated threads are interwoven in the pick preceding the interweaving of 
 the wire, and also in the pick following it, with a filling-thread to the ground cloth. After a 
 certain number of wires have been inserted, the first interwoven wire is drawn out of the fabric 
 to be used over, which operation is repeated in rotation with every wire. We find terry and 
 velvet piles. If the pile is produced by the filling, some or all filling-threads must float in 
 certain places to allow the thread to be cut at this place, or its fibres to be raised during the 
 process of finishing the fabric, ........ 53, 118 
 
 Designs for, . . . . . . . . . .118 
 
 Plain-weave, also known as cotton-weave; in this weave, warp and filling cross each other at 
 right angles, and interweave alternately. Frequently used for ground-weave in Jacquard designs. 
 Point Tie-up or Centre Tie-up, ........ 33 
 
 Point Tie-up, for two-ply ingrain carpets, ....... 78 
 
 Point Tie-up in three Sections, ........ 55 
 
 Preserving of designs executed on n paper, ...... 107 
 
 Presser, a part of the Lacing machine, ........ 99 
 
 Punch, as used in the Piano Card-stamping machine, ..... 86 
 
 As used in the Repeating machine, ....... 93 
 
 Punch-head, a part of the Piano machine, ....... 86 
 
 A part of the Repeating machine, ....... 93 
 
 Rack, a part of the Piano Card-stamping machine, ...... 88 
 
 Reed, a series of narrow strips of metal, between which the warp-threads pass in the loom. The 
 purpose of the reed is to keep the warp evenly divided, also to strike the filling in many places 
 at the beating the reed towards the breast-beam of the loom. The reed is known by numbers, 
 the number in each case indicating how many splits are in one inch. 
 
 Rule for ascertaining the reed number, if the number of ends in the warp and the width 
 in the reed are known ; the threads per dent either given or to be selected according to the 
 fabric : — Divide the number of ends in the warp by the width in the reed, which gives the 
 number of threads per inch ; divide this result again by the number of threads in one dent, 
 according to the weave or rows deep of comber-board. Whole numbers or half numbers are 
 generally used for grading reeds only. 
 Reel, or Idler, a part of the Repeating machine, ...... 93 
 
 Repeat, that which is to be repeated; as the repeat of a pattern, the repeat of an effect in a 
 
 design, etc. 
 Repeating Machine, for Jacquard cards, ....... 92 
 
 Reserve Rows. Nearly every Jacquard machine contains two extra rows of needles in addition 
 
 to the number as classified, ......... 10 
 
 Satin-weaves are characterized by a smooth face. The stitch of the threads is opposite to that 
 of the twill weaves. The foundations for designing a satin-weave are, in the first place, to 
 arrange as much as possible distributed stitching ; in the second, to have this as regular as 
 possible. The satin-weaves commence with the five-harness, and can after this be made on 
 any number of harness. 
 
 To find the run of stitching in the easiest way, use the following rule : Divide the 
 number of harness into two parts, which must neither be equal, nor the one a multiple of the 
 other. Afterwards take one result and add it, commencing to count from 1 until all threads 
 or harnesses are taken up, as example : Five harness — 5 = 2 + 3. Commencing with one 
 and adding two points, we have as follows : 1 -|- 2 = 3 -|- 2 = 5 -I- 2 = 7, or 2 + 2 = 4. 
 This will give the stitch as : 1, 3, 5, 2, 4, which means : the first pick stitches in the first warp- 
 thread, the second pick stitches in the third warp-thread, the third pick stitches in the fifth 
 warp-thread, the fourth pick stitches in the second warp-thread, the fifth pick stitches in the 
 fourth warp-thread. 
 
 Are frequently employed for ground-weaves in Jacquard designs. 
 
 Section of the comber-board, dividing the comber-board in its depth. 
 
126 
 
 FACE 
 
 Sectional Harness Arrangement, ... ■ • • . 26 
 
 Selecting Needle, used in the Repeating mai hine, ...... <vi 
 
 Selvedge, the edge of cloth, woven in such a manner as to prevent ravelling, and often closed by 
 
 complicating the threads; also called List, Listing. 
 Setting of Figures in a sketch, ........ 10S 
 
 Setting of the Cylinder, ......... 18 
 
 Shading of textile fabrics by the weave . . . . . . . . 11S 
 
 Rules for, . . . . . . . . . , ,,« 
 
 Shed, the separation of the warp to allow the shuttle to pass through. 
 
 Shot-about, the alternate exchange (filling ways) of figure up and ground up in two-ply ingrain 
 
 carpet, .......... 72, 117 
 
 Shuttles are the means for carrying the filling into and through the shed. 
 
 Shuttle-box Mechanism, for carpet hand-looms, ..... 80 
 
 Shuttle-raceway, the part of the lay on which the shuttle travels to and fro. 
 Silk consists of the pale yellow, buff colored, or white fibre, which the silk worm spins around 
 about itself when entering the pupa or chrysalis state. Spun Silks are calculated as to size of 
 the thread on the same basis as cotton. The adopted custom of specifying the size of raw 
 silk is by giving the weight of 1000 yards in drams, avoirdupois. 
 Single Cloth, selection of designing paper, ....... 105 
 
 Single- lift Jacquard Machine. By it warp-threads, as called for, according to the Jacquard 
 
 cards, are raised and lowered each pick. 
 Sizes of Jacquard Machines, ........ 10 
 
 Sketches, enlarging and reducing figures for, . . . . . no 
 
 Sketch, principles for, .......... 108 
 
 Size required, ......... 109 
 
 Transferring to the a designing paper, . . . . .112, 115 
 
 Skipper, technical name for a part of the Piano Card-stamping machine, ... 88 
 
 Spools. This technical term applies to a barrel, having a head on each end. 
 
 Spring Frame, a part of the Jacquard machine, ...... 14 
 
 Springs, as used in connection with the needles in the Jacquard machine, . . .9, 10, 15 
 
 Squaring-off, a process employed for enlarging and reducing figures in sketches, . .110 
 
 A process employed in the construction of original sketches, . . . . in 
 
 A process employed in transferring the sketch to the n designing paper, . . 112, 115 
 
 Straight-through Tie-up. The Jacquard harness threaded on the machine in the direction from 
 front to rear, 
 
 The Jacquard harness threaded on the machine in the direction from rear to front, 
 
 On the English system, .... 
 
 For repeating effects in one repeat of the design, 
 
 ■ For two-ply ingrain carpets, 
 
 ■ In four sections, .... 
 
 In three sections, ..... 
 
 In two sections (for double cloth), 
 
 Of a Jacquard harness, having front harness attached, 
 
 — Single and double sections combined, 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 74 
 
 
 
 
 57 
 
 
 
 
 53 
 
 
 48, 
 
 50, 
 
 5i 
 32 
 
 5i 
 
 39. 
 
 42, 
 
 43. 
 
 46 
 70 
 
 Straight-through Tie-up and Point Tie-up, combined, . . 35, 
 
 Applied to a double-lift double-cylinder Jacquard machine, 
 
 Stop Motions, for looms, are attachments for stopping the loom when the filling breaks or runs 
 
 out. The Protector, an additional attachment to the loom, might also be classified as a stop 
 
 motion, as it stops the loom in case the shuttle fails to reach its box. 
 Super, a two-ply ingrain carpet constructed with 960 threads warp (36 inch wide fabric), 
 
 exclusive of the selvedge, ......... 76 
 
 Tail-cords, the substitutes of the regular hooks used in the ingrain carpet machine, . 71 
 
 
127 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Temples, attachments to the loom on each side of the selvedge, for holding the last woven part of 
 the fabric in even width, with the width of the fabric in its reed, thus preventing as much 
 useless chafing of the warp as possible. 
 
 Terry, a loop ; an uncut pile fabric. 
 
 Textile, a woven fabric. 
 
 Texture, changing, for fabrics using a Jacquard harness threaded in the solid comber-board, . 21 
 Number of warp and filling-ends in one inch; there are two textures : 
 
 a, for the fabric in the loom (reed). 
 
 b, for the finished fabric. 
 
 Twills are frequently employed as ground-weaves for Jacquard designs. 
 
 A weave running diagonally across the fabric. They are divided into even-sided, uneven- 
 sided, broken, and fancy twills. 
 
 Twist. The amount and the direction of the twist in yarns of any kind of material is very 
 important ; thus it should never be overlooked in the preparation of a design for textile fabrics. 
 
 Tying-up of Jacquard Looms, with compound harness attached, . . . .58 
 
 Vaucanson, the inventor of the griffe, ....... 7 
 
 Velvet, a cut pile fabric. 
 
 Warp, the threads running lengthwise in a cloth; the yarn which passes through the Jacquard 
 harness and the reed. 
 
 ■Weave, the way the two systems of threads (warp and filling), composed of any kind of material, 
 are interlaced. 
 
 Whip-thread. See Douping Warp. 
 
 Witches. See Dobbies. 
 
 Wool. By the term wool we comprehend the hairy covering of several species of mamalia, more 
 especially that of the sheep. It is more flexible, elastic and curly than hair. Wool as used 
 for warp and filling is either combed or carded, technically know as worsted or wool-spun yarn. 
 The size of the thread for worsted is calculated by 560 yards to 16 ounces for No. 1, and the 
 same number of yards is added for each successive number balanced by the original 16 ounces. 
 For woolen yarn two methods of calculating the size are in use : The Cut system, having 300 
 yards to one cut (16 ounces) ; the Run system, having 1600 yards to one run (16 ounces). 
 The same number of yards are added to each successive number of cut or run, also to be 
 balanced by the original 16 ounces. 
 
The Bridesburg Manuf'g Co. 
 
 Textile Machinery Builders, 
 20 1 -203 Chestnut Street, Philadelphia. 
 
 Stocktox Bates, President. Wm. D. Shubert, Secretary. 
 
 ^afiffifs^B 
 
 Roller, Goodyear, and Witch Harness, Sheeting, Duck, Bag, 
 
 Clipper, Gebhart, Ticking, 
 
 AND ALL KINDS ARRANGED FOR JACQUARD TOPS. 
 
 Wool and Worsted Cards, 
 
 Pickers, Renovators, Mules. 
 
 Shoddy and Hair Pickers. 
 
 Foss & Pevey, — Wellman, — and Iron Roller Cards. 3 
 Drawing, — Railway Heads, — Spinning Frames, 
 Reels, — Mill Warpers, — Spoolers. 
 
 Plans for all kinds of Mills made. 
 
& 
 
 <?• 
 
 ^ILLINGTO^ 
 
 <£ 
 
 -Established 1848.- 
 
 C: 
 
 O 
 
 MANUFACTURERS' SUPPLIES 
 
 OF EVERY DESCRIPTION, FOR 
 
 COTTON, WOOLEN, SILK, AND WORSTED MACHINERY. 
 
 3VIA.>TTL"F^.CTt7RER:~ OF 
 
 Bobbins, Spools, Shuttles, and $kewers, 
 
 Oak Leather Belting, Machine Cards, and Specialties. 
 QENERAL MILL FURNISHERS. 
 
 No. 113 Chestnut Street, 
 
 Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 CORRESPONDENCE SOLICITED. 
 
 BAEBOUE'S IRISH FLAX THREAD, 
 
 1784 
 
 1887 
 
 BARBOUR'S JACQUAED HAEXESS THREAD, 
 
 Noted for Strength and Smoothness, and Warranted not to Stretch. 
 
 THE BARBOUR BROTHERS COMPANY, 
 
 New York, Boston, Philadelphia, Chicago, St. Louis, and San Francisco. 
 
 Represented by VINCENT T. RAFTERTY. 
 
 /Dattitvo tfoe experience and facilities for maLu iieaioiv ilapers in all sizes, we are enabled, 
 to supplu manufacturers wito we best at tfoe loieest tates. Special sizes made to azaez. 
 Will be pleased to aive uou prices [or ami auantiht or: size «ou mat) need. 
 
(Single and Double Action) 
 
 Of Improved Construction. 
 
 We give great attention to 
 the workmanship, use only the 
 best materials, and produce 
 
 Tie Best Machine in the Market. 
 
 Our prices compare favor- 
 ably with those more cheaply 
 built, 
 
 We furnish machines con- 
 structed on the English plan 
 — leaving out bottom board 
 and glass rods — when desired. 
 
 Geo. W. Stafford Mfg. Co. 
 
 Nos. 3 and 5 Point Street, Providence, R. I., 
 MACHINE BUILDERS. 
 
 Single and Double Action Jacquards, 
 
 Single and Double Action Dobbies, 
 
 The only Double Action Open Shed Positive Dobbie, 
 Equalizing Spring Jacks, 
 
 Cottrell's Positive Let-off Motion, etc., etc. 
 
 Sketches and Designs furnished and Cards Cut. Mail Eyes, Twine, 
 
 Lingoes, Wires, Springs, etc., furnished. Leno Weaving— 
 
 both simple and compound— a specialty. 
 
 STAFFORD'S PATENT 
 
 Comber Board. 
 
 (Patented September 6, 1S87.) 
 
 This Comber-board can be seen at the Textile School, 1336 Spring Garden 
 Street, Philadelphia. 
 
 The divisions are made with 
 wires crossing each other, giving 
 the least possible wearing surface 
 on the twine, thus reducing fric- 
 tion on the outside of the harness, 
 and consequent wear; preventing 
 bagging and the jumpingof lingoes; 
 Jacquards can be run at much 
 higher speed where this board 
 is adopted. Five years' use has 
 sustained the above claims and 
 demonstrated its practicability. 
 
THE TEXTILE RECORD, 
 
 425 WALNUT STREET, PHILADELPHIA. 
 
 THE FOREMOST TEXTILE JOURNAL OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 Covering every tDepccrt/nent of Textile McuxufcLctuure. 
 
 Weaving and Jacquard Work Fully Discussed. 
 
 Each Number 
 
 filled with 
 
 Original and Practical 
 
 Articles. 
 
 1 
 
 _ /■/'[i.u/.-. riij.i .:: i n i mt 
 
 mm 
 
 i ; T=f_ E 
 
 
 gHSJ § 
 
 SSS-.. . 
 
 HP: 
 
 ' Sana J 
 
 
 
 gfe= 
 
 
 
 -■:■! 
 
 
 m 
 
 S^Sa Si 
 
 
 tt&k = 
 
 t^Jf^-iS 
 
 HP 5 
 
 a? <= 
 
 -y.--- ■^•^■au. 
 
 The largest staff 
 
 of 
 
 Expert Contributors. 
 
 THE TEXTILE RECORD has positive practical value to every mill 
 owner and mill worker. 
 
 Its contributions to the literature of the textile industry surpass in 
 value and interest everything yet attempted on this side of the Atlantic. 
 
 RICHLY ILLUSTRATED IN EACH NUMBER. 
 
 SAMPLE COPIES ON APPLICATION TO 
 
 The Textile Record, 
 No. 425 Walnut Street, 
 
 PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
 
a 
 
 «0 
 
 °0 
 
 s 
 
 Ss 
 
 ROYLE'SK- 
 
 fc. 
 
 
 «0 
 r£ 
 
 Hi 
 
 8 
 
 
 o 
 
 <s> 
 
 <T> 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 «o> 
 
 1 
 
 a. 
 
 Co 
 
 £ 
 
 k 
 
 «V1 
 
 5! 
 
 £ 
 
 a 
 
 <N. 
 
 >i 
 
 >* 
 
 a, 
 
 & 
 
 
 2 
 
 i? 
 
 b 
 
 § 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 >j 
 
 *n 
 
 
 ?~4 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 5o 
 
 cv 
 
 IMPROVED PIANO MACHINES 
 
 -AND- 
 
 Automatic, Positive Action, 
 
 POWER REPEATERS, 
 
 For Cutting- Jacquard Pattern Cards. 
 
 SMflilil U2IL1S H1®11111¥b 
 
 WARPERS, BEAMERS, QUILLERS, DOBBIES, COVERING 
 OR "GIMP" MACHINES, TWISTERS, &c. 
 
 JOHN ROYLE & SONS, 
 
 PATERSON, N. J. 
 
NEW HIGH-SPEED POWER LOOM FOR INGRAIN CARPETS. 
 Built by THE M. A. FURBUSH & SON MACHINE CO, Philadelphia, Pa, U. S. A. 
 
 ne Hundred Picks per Minute. -®a Fifteen Shuttles Pick and Pick. 
 
— ^TE W — 
 
 HIGH-SPEED POWER LOOM FOR INGRAIN CARPETS. 
 
 Bnilt by THE M. A. FURBUSH & SON MACHINE CO,. Philadelphia, Pa, U. S. A. 
 
 B^-ONE HUNDRED PICKS PER MINUTE."®* FIFTEEN SHUTTLES PICK AND PICK. 
 
 This Loom combines the best features of the Duckworth and Murkland Looms; 
 while possessing the shading capacity of the latter, it is easier in its operation, and 
 of a considerably higher speed than either. 
 
 The following points as to the construction and operation of this Loom will 
 prove to any manufacturer, superintendent, fixer or weaver the superiority of the 
 same over any other style : 
 
 Runs light. There is no heavy lay to operate, as in other looms. The 
 lay (raceway and boxes) are stationary, and the filling is beaten up by means of a 
 comb, which is the only part that swings ; being light, it can easily accomplish the 
 movements necessary for the one hundred picks per minute, which could never be 
 attained by operating the lay as in any other loom. 
 
 No tearing of cloth by the shuttle catching in the warp and being drawn 
 up by the reed, as the comb for beating up the filling passes in front of the shuttle. 
 
 Kasy on filling. The peculiar shape of the filling fork allows the shuttle to 
 pass under it, at the same time merely opening wide enough to admit the filling. 
 The motion is easy and delicate, and will not break the poorest filling — a great point 
 of superiority over all other high-speed looms, in which there is always more or less 
 tendency to chop the filling. 
 
 Shuttle boxes. The box mechanism is the same as in the Murkland Loom, 
 there being a revolver of seven boxes and three upright boxes, thus giving ten 
 boxes on each side, or twenty in all. 
 
 The Jacquard machine is constructed principally as in the Duckworth Loom, 
 although the cylinder gauge, boards and journals are like those of the Murkland. 
 The cylinder is worked with the rock shaft of the Duckworth Loom, instead of a 
 cam shaft. 
 
 The change gears for take-up, instead of being worm gears, are ratchet ; 
 but the number of teeth to number of picks is the same as in the Murkland. 
 
 Power back-off. The Loom has a power back-off, as in the Duckworth, a 
 pressure of the foot being sufficient to reverse the Loom. 
 
 Separate cams are provided for each arrangement of boxes, instead of segment 
 cams as in the Murkland Loom. 
 
 The Loom is pick and pick. Journals are operated from below by 
 cams and treadles. 
 
 The new Loom covers all the features demanded in a perfect Ingrain Carpet 
 Loom, including ability to make all the new weaves. 
 
;f 
 
 Biddeford, Maine, 
 
 MANUFACTURERS OF 
 
 RAW HIDE AND LEATHER 
 
 Loom Pickers and Straps, 
 
 Including many varieties of Raw Hide Pickers never 
 Par B e ox P pick t er DrOP bef ° re made fa th ' S countr >'' such as Pressed Centre. 
 
 Scoops, Centre Scoops, Pressed Centres, Feathered Feet Bows, XL Bows, 
 
 All of which are a superior substitute for the ordinary Bow Picker. 
 
 Sole Manufacturers of the 
 
 Packer Patent Dsop Box Picked, 
 
 Which is so constructed that the blow is against the edge of the hide forming the body of the 
 Picker. These Pickers have no plug in the Shuttle Strike to be driven out or worked loose, and 
 they are guaranteed not to break at the head. 
 
 Also, Manufacturers of 
 
 LOOM HARNESSES OF SUPERIOR QUALITY. 
 
 All Harnesses are made of the very best quality of twine and stock, and are carefully finished. 
 They are guaranteed to possess all the requirements of a superior article. 
 
 An niuetrated Catalogue giving a detailed description of our goods will be mailed on application. 
 
 ¥TJP 
 
 
 MANUFACTURER OF 
 
 REEDS and HEDDLES 
 
 .A. rid IDealer in 
 
 Manufacturers' Supplies, 
 
 JSTos. 191 and 193 ^ei-ks Street, 
 
 PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
 
Patent Jacquard Machines 
 
 Applied to any Style or Make of Power Looms, for any Kind of Figured Goods. 
 
 jingle Lift?, Double Lift?, I^aige m Drop Jacquard^, 
 
 WITCH MOTIONS (OOBBY MACHINES), SINGLE AND DOUBLE-LIFT HEDDLE MACHINES. 
 
 JACQUARD CARD-STAMPING MACHINES. 
 
 Piano Steam-Power Card- 
 Stamping Machine, 
 
 For Jacquard Cards. 
 
 The speed is completely at the 
 will of the operator, and will 
 punch as high as 170 strokes per 
 minute. The capacity is about 
 double that of a foot-power ma- 
 chine. Two cards can be stamped 
 at once. 
 
 Dobby Card-Punching Machine 
 
 This machine is built for punching Jac- 
 quard or Dobby Cards of the strongest 
 pasteboard, punching the whole card at 
 one revolution or stroke. After the keys 
 are set, any number of duplicates can be 
 punched. It is well constructed, simple, 
 and a most effective machine. 
 
 Piano Foot-Treading 
 Card-Stamping Machine. 
 
 I have lately reconstructed this 
 machine, making it more com- 
 pact by a novel and durable es- 
 capement of the rack. 
 
 The only successful machine ever 
 introduced for this purpose. 
 
 Far superior to hand lacing for regu- 
 larity and durability. 
 
 Light-running, simple and durable. 
 
 Can be operated by a small girl or 
 boy. 
 
 Will lace 800 to 2000 cards per hour. 
 
 Thoroughly and satisfactorily tested. 
 
 Weighs about 500 pounds. 
 
 Machines now in operation and ready 
 for the inspection of manufacturers. 
 
 Machines placed on trial with re- 
 sponsible parties. 
 
 Jacquard Card-Lacing Machine, 
 
 W. 1*. UHLINGER, 
 
 Nos. 14 to 36 Canal Street, Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 (Take red car on Third Street to Frankford Avenue and Canal Street.) 
 
Knowles' New Ingrain Power Carpet Loom, 
 
 Designed to meet a want long felt in the manufacture of Ingrain Carpets, for a loom that should be simple in its construc- 
 tion, easy of operation, positive in its motions, and could be run at a high rate of speed. 
 
 The KNOWLES LOOM WORKS take pleasure in calling the attention of carpet manufacturers to their new 
 INGRAIN CARPET LOOM, as one in which all the above features are combined in such a manner as to make a loom that 
 meets ilie requirements mentioned above, and one that will be highly appreciated by manufacturers of those goods for which 
 the loom is designed. 
 
 The following are among the import- 
 ant features : 
 
 The journals on the loom are con- 
 trolled by a cam motion, or by the same 
 efficient chain motion that is used on our 
 Worsted Loom instead of the cam motion, 
 handling the warp with the greatest ease 
 and calling either journal at will, which 
 cannot be done on other carpet looms, thus 
 giving a wider range of pattern and design 
 than on other looms ; and should it be 
 necessary to change the shading, it can be 
 dime by changing the chain, instead of 
 culling oul the warp and re-drawing it. 
 
 The box mechanism is positive, and 
 controlled by a chain on the same shaft as 
 the journals, and may be used with the 
 chain alone, or with the chain in combina- 
 tion with the cards. The motion can be 
 run forward or reversed at will, and any 
 box called as desired, thus giving a wide 
 range to the shading facilities of the loom, 
 and any combination of colors can be pro- 
 duced on this loom that can be done on 
 any 4X4 box loom in the world. 
 
 The Jacquard is of our own manu- 
 facture, and of the most improved pattern. 
 Great care is used in its construction, thus 
 making it a very efficient part of the loom, 
 and is^driven from the same shaft as the 
 journals and box motion, thus working in 
 harmony with them. 
 
 The take-up motion is positive, and 
 is very substantial and accurate, consisting 
 of fluted rolls, and operated by the usual 
 irain of gearing, while the goods are wound 
 up on a roll below. 
 
 The let-off "is controlled by the tension 
 of the warp over a rocking whip roll, 
 operated by a cam on the bottom shaft, held by a clamp friction, geared to the head of the beam. 
 
 Two filling motions are used, one at each end of the lay, each 'working independently of ihe other, inside the selvedge, 
 so that the breakage of the weft is instantly delected, and these motions are so combined with friction pulley and brake, 
 that the loom is stopped instantly "on the pick," and consequently, when filling is replaced, the loom is ready to start 
 without loss of time in finding the pick, or setting of Jacquard or box motion. 
 
 The shuttle-smash protector, which knocks off the loom when the shuttle does not box properly, thus preventing what 
 are known as " shuttle smashes ; " a shuttle check, for easing the force of the shuttle as it enters the box ; a fool lever, for 
 throwing the lay back when the loom is stopped, making it very easy for the weaver, and the speed at which the loom 
 can be run, together with the features mentioned above, combine to make this loom the best in the market for the 
 purpose for which it is designed. 
 
 Correspondence solicited and circulars sent on application. 
 
 KN©WI,ES &©OM ¥OIlS f 
 
 No. 57 Jackson Street, Worcester, Mass. 
 
 
 ■ 
 
Schaum & Uhlinger, 
 
 1030-1038 New Market St., Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 MANUFACTURERS OF 
 
 RIBBON, TAPE AND WEBBING LOOMS, 
 
 LATEST IMPROVEMENTS. NEW PATTERNS. 
 
 LATHES OR BATTONS, 
 
 For Ribbons, Fringes, Tapes, Suspender and Goring Web, &c. We construct our Lathes on 
 correct mechanical principles, use only the best materials, and produce THE BEST LATHE 
 IN THE MARKET. Write to us for estimates : it will pay you. 
 
 JACQUARD MACHINES, 
 
 With any desired number of hooks. Applied to any manufacture of loom. 
 
 Harness Tied up for' all Figured Weaving. 
 
 A FULL LINE OF WEAVERS' SUPPLIES : 
 
 Hails, Linpes, Miles, Harness Twine, Conpt-Boaris, Glass Biiies, Shuffle Eyes, fc 
 
 If you contemplate manufacturing Figured Goods, write to us for information, or send us 
 samples of the goods you desire to make, and we will furnish you estimates for a complete equip- 
 ment, including Jacquard Machines, with harness tied-up, designs made, cards cut, &c. 
 
 Fifteen years' practical experience in this line of business enables us to give our customers 
 the BEST RESULTS with the LEAST EXPENSE. 
 
 Schaum & Uhlinger, 
 
 1030-1038 New Market St., Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
TEXTILE SCHOOL 
 
 Pennsylvania Museum and School of Industrial Art, 
 
 Classrooms : - 
 
 f No. 1336 Spring Garden Street, 
 
 I S. E. Cor. Broad. & Spring Garden Sts. 
 
 THE LEADING TEXTILE SCHOOL IN AMERICA. 
 
 lounded in co-operation with the Trustees of the Penna. Museum and School of Industrial Art, 
 
 WM. PLATT PEPPER, President, 
 
 by the following members of the Philadelphia Textile Association : 
 
 Thomas Dolan & Co., 
 John & James Dobson, 
 William Wood & Co., 
 William Arrott, 
 John Yewdall, 
 
 Fiss, Banes, Erben & Co., 
 Conyers Button & Co., 
 George & James Bromley, 
 Seville Schofield, 
 Alexander Crow & Son, 
 James Smith & Co., 
 
 M. A. Furbush & Son, 
 John Bromley & Sons, 
 Thomas L. Leedom, 
 James Doak, Jr. & Co., 
 Charles Spencer & Co., 
 H. Becker & Co., 
 
 Andreas Hartel, 
 S. B. M. Fleisher, 
 Grundy Bros. & Campion, 
 H. W. Butterworth & Sons, 
 Stead & Miller. 
 
 Extract from COURSE OF STUDY for Day Class, requiring three years' attendance at School. 
 
 FIRST YEAR'S COURSE. 
 
 The hand-loom, analyzed and explained. 
 
 Elementary principles of " dressing " warps ; beaming the 
 same ; fixing of harness ; drawing-in ; reed and reed calcu- 
 lations, etc., for single cloth. 
 
 A general study of the nature of materials used in weaving 
 textile fabrics ; explanation of the necessary materials and 
 instruments used by designers. 
 
 Weaves. — Ground or Foundation Weaves. 
 
 I. Plain, or cotton weave, and fancy figuring through 
 color arrangements in warp and filling, for light-weight 
 fabrics. 
 
 II. Twill weaves — a, one-sided twills; 6, even-sided 
 twills ; and fancy figuring with same through color arrange- 
 ments in warp and filling. 
 
 III. Satin weaves — a, single satins ; 6, double satins ; 
 c, figuring in single satins. 
 
 Drafting Weaves. 
 Lectures, with practical examples and rules observed. 
 
 Derivative Weaves. 
 
 Basket, rib, and granite weaves ; steep, curved, broken, 
 skip, corkscrew, and fancy twills ; pointed twills and honey, 
 comb weaves ; pique weaves, and combinations of miscel- 
 laneous weaves. 
 
 Standard sizes of cotton wool and worsted yarns, with 
 calculations. 
 
 Picking out samples of textile fabrics constructed on 
 
 single weaves, with methods and rules employed in dupli- 
 cation. 
 
 Original weaves for single cloth ; complete orders for 
 manufacturing. 
 
 Instrumental drawing in elementary exercises, with 
 instruments ; construction of plane figures ; line shading, etc. 
 
 Freehand drawing ; enlargement and reduction of designs ; 
 analysis of plants for the purpose of design for textile 
 fabrics. 
 
 Work in color ; lectures on color harmony. 
 
 SECOND YEAR'S COURSE. 
 
 The power-looms analyzed and explained, and practical 
 weaving and fixing; a, the Thos. Wood roller loom, for 
 ginghams, shirtings, cottonades, dress goods, etc. ; b, the 
 Crompton loom, and c, the Knowles loom, for worsted and 
 woolen fabrics of every description ; single and double 
 beam work. 
 
 Double Cloths — Study of the best methods of combining 
 different weaves, as : Designs backed with weft ; designs 
 backed with warp ; designs backed with warp and weft ; 
 designs for double cloth, double faced. 
 
 Calculation: ascertaining the cost, production, etc., of th 
 different fabrics. 
 
 Analyses of single cloth (fancy), and double cloth fabri 
 and reproduction with various changes, as requested. 
 
 The Jacquard Machine Analyzed and Explained; principles 
 of construction and method of operation of the single lift 
 machine ; the various modifications, such as double lift single 
 cylinder, double lift double cylinder; "laying out" ot 
 
 the 
 cs, 
 
Second Year's Course — continued. 
 
 THIRD YEAR'S COURSE. 
 
 comber-boards, and figuring for various changes in texture ; 
 tying-up of harness for single cloth. 
 
 The Bridesburg Clipper Loom analyzed and explained, and 
 practical work on it, with special reference to its use in 
 connection with the double lift double cylinder Jacquard 
 machine for damask table-covers, etc. 
 
 Card-stamping machines (French index) analyzed and 
 explained, and actual work for single cloth on the machine; 
 explanation of, and practical work in card-lacing. 
 
 Theoretical work ; designing paper with reference to the 
 different textures of single cloth fabrics. 
 
 Sketching of designs for single cloth, and transferring 
 sketch to the n designing paper. 
 
 Shading of fabrics by the weave. 
 
 Analysis of Jacquard work for actual reproduction ; also 
 for reproduction with various (given) changes. 
 
 Study of special fabrics, such as dress trimmings, fringes, 
 etc. 
 
 Study of processes for textile fabrics before and after 
 weaving. 
 
 Instrumental drawing in lettering; drawing plans for 
 machinery, rooms, mill buildings, etc. 
 
 Illustrating processes of weaving. 
 
 Illustrating sectional cuts of textile fabrics, etc. 
 
 Freehand drawing; sketching for the different textile 
 fabrics on Jacquard work. 
 
 Work in color ; lectures (advanced course) ; practice in 
 the use of color. 
 
 Chemistry. 
 
 Theory of Chemistry applicable to the textile art. 
 
 The two-ply ingrain carpet machine analyzed and ex- 
 plained. 
 
 The ingrain carpet hand-loom, and the ingrain carpet 
 power-loom, built by the M. A. Furbush & Son Machine Co., 
 analyzed, explained, and practical work. 
 
 Card-stamping machine (American index) analyzed, ex- 
 plained, and practical work. 
 
 Tying-up of Jacquard harness (French index) machines 
 for double cloth; three and four-ply fabrics. 
 
 Advanced Work for the Harness Loom. 
 
 Study and practical work of cut pile fabrics — velvets, 
 plushes, etc. ; terry pile fabrics, with wires and without 
 wires ; terry and velvet pile combined. 
 
 Astrakans, cut, uncut, also cut and uncut combined. 
 
 Chenille, rugs, curtains, etc. 
 
 Gauze fabrics, plain, figured, and combined with other 
 weaves. 
 
 Designing for upholstery fabrics, Jacquard gauze, Brus- 
 sels carpet, tapestry carpet, double face Brussels carpet, etc. 
 
 Card-stamping on the French index stamping machine for 
 two, three, and four-ply fabrics. 
 
 Instrumental and freehand drawing similar to second 
 year's course, but for more difficult objects in textile fabrics 
 and machinery. 
 
 Work in color; application of theory of harmony to dyeing. 
 
 Chemistry. 
 Theory and practice of chemistry, including actual work 
 in the laboratory and dyeing of fabrics. 
 
 T. C. SEARCH, 
 
 Chairman Committee on Instruction of the School, 
 and Pres. Phila. Textile Association. 
 
 The Circular of the Committee on Instruction will be mailed upon application. 
 
 PRESS COMMENTS. 
 
 A Model School of Industrial Art. 
 
 We cannot, at this time, speak of its provisions by which 
 drawing, modeling, designing, etc., are taught; but we 
 desire to call particular attention to the facilities that are 
 offered for a practical instruction in weaving and textile 
 design. Special courses are provided for teaching designing 
 for all varieties of textile fabrics, and its practical amplication 
 to loom work. As a complete course in its theoretical and 
 practical utility we do not hesitate to say it is without an 
 equal in America. A school of this kind is of the highest 
 importance to the manufacturing community that centres 
 about Philadelphia. — Boston Journal of Commerce. 
 
 An American Textile School. 
 
 The Textile Department of the Pennsylvania Museum 
 and School of Industrial Art clearly fulfils the requirements 
 
 of a good Textile School, and the promise is that it will 
 speedily become one of the best in the world, as it is now 
 decidedly the most advanced in this country. Pupils are 
 taught designing for all varieties of textile fabrics, and lo 
 make them thoroughly familiar with loom work, so that 
 they may be able not only to prepare their own designs, but 
 also to reproduce their own patterns in the cloth. 
 
 This institution, by fitting young Americans for exact 
 scientific work in the textile industries, will confer a huge 
 benefit upon them and upon the nation. — The Textile 
 Record of America. 
 
 The Textile Department of the School of Industrial 
 Art, 1336 Spring Garden St. 
 
 Many scholars who have been at this school in former 
 years are now filling responsible and profitable positions. — 
 The Bulletin, Phila. 
 
Thomas Wood & Co., 
 
 FAIRMOUNT MACHINE WORKS, 
 
 Twenty-Second and Wood Streets, 
 
 Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 POWER LOOMS. 
 
 Patent Bobbin Winding Machines. 
 Patent Cop Winding Machines. 
 Improved Presser Beaming Machines. 
 Plain Beaming Machines. 
 Improved Reels for Wool, Worsted, Cotton, 
 
 Linen, etc. 
 Improved Presser Spoolers. 
 Plain Spoolers. 
 Warp Splitting Machines. 
 Hank Twisting Machines. 
 
 Warping Mills with Patent Driving Heads 
 
 and Improved Hecks. 
 Single and Double Warp Sizing Machines. 
 Dyeing Machines for Warp and Piece Goods. 
 Cradle and Cone Indigo Mills. 
 Fulling Mills. 
 Calendering Machines. 
 Self-acting Wool Scouring Machines. 
 Yarn Bundling Presses. 
 Loom Beam Trucks. 
 
 Shafting, Hangers, Pulleys, etc. 
 
 Adjustable Self-oiling Bearings. 
 Patent Friction Pulleys. 
 Improved Cut-off Coupling. 
 
 Patent Couplings. 
 Patent Loose Pulleys. 
 
 Gearinsf. 
 
 ELEVATORS. 
 
 Plans Made and Factories Completely Equipped with Machinery. 
 
 
and Manufacturers' Supplies. 
 
 SOLE PHILADELPHIA AGENT FOR 
 
 STODDARD, LOVERING & CO., 
 
 Boston, Massachusetts, and Bradford, England. 
 
 Importers of English 'Worsted Machinery, and Hattersley Looms, for every class 
 of work. Also, Pickers, Temples, Loom Springs, and White's Picker Leather 
 in the side or by the strap, Torlotin's Sizing; also, all other English Supplies. 
 
 ALSO AGENT FOR 
 
 CHARLES L. IRESON, 
 
 Boston, Massachusetts. 
 
 Pure Oak-tanned Leather Belting and Findings, Wire-sewed Belting, and maker 
 of Ireson's Patent Self-adjusting Leather Link Belting. 
 
 STEDMAN & SMITH, 
 
 Lawrence, Massachusetts. 
 Machinists and makers of Machine Castings, and every kind of Mill work. 
 
 JOHN W. BARLOW, 
 
 Lawrence, Massachusetts. 
 Bow, Drop Box, English Scoop, or other Pickers of best quality. 
 
 BANNING, BISSELL & CO., 
 
 New York, N. Y. 
 
 Porcelain Department : — Pot Eyes, Steps, Shuttle Eyes, and Pottery Goods of 
 every description. 
 
 Single and Double Belting, Belt Hooks, Springs, Temples, Picker and Lace Leather 
 (Coupes), Cleaning Cloths, Belt Dressing, (both American and Hepburn & Gale's English), 
 Felt Cloth, Porcelain Goods, Fibre Washers, Banding, Gears, &c, &c, in stock at all 
 times. All Supplies not in stock can be procured at once. 
 
 WORSTED MILL MACHINERY AND SUPPLIES A SPECIALTY. 
 
 DAVID B. DOUGLASS, 
 
 201 Church St., Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
571 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 1 1 III II I 111 III I ill 
 
 018 450 678 6 •